Timers

Timers
Bulletin No. C48T-C
Drawing No. LP0394
Revised 3/01
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion-controls.com
C48T SERIES - 1/16 DIN TIMERS
MODEL C48TS - SINGLE PRESET
MODEL C48TD - DUAL PRESET
O
LCD, 7 SEGMENT, 2 LINE, 6 DIGIT DISPLAY, POSITIVE
REFLECTIVE OR NEGATIVE TRANSMISSIVE MODELS WITH
RED TOP LINE AND GREEN BOTTOM LINE BACKLIGHTING
O
SOLID STATE AND RELAY OUTPUT MODELS
O
FIELD REPLACEABLE RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS
O
STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS
O
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
O
O
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUTS AND FRONT PANEL
FUNCTION KEY
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE OPERATOR
ACCESS PRIVILEGES AND PROTECTED VALUE MENU
O
HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL STACKING OF MULTIPLE UNITS
O
85 to 250 VAC or 18 to 36 VDC/24 VAC POWERED UNITS
O
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OPTION
O
CHOICE OF NUMERIC DATA ENTRY MODES
UL Recognized Component,
File # E137808
The Dual Preset models are available with solid-state or Relay outputs. The
Single Preset model has a solid-state and relay output in parallel. All solid-state
outputs are available in a choice of NPN current sinking or PNP current
sourcing, open-collector transistor outputs. All relay output boards are field
replaceable.
The optional RS-485 serial communication interface provides two-way
communication between a C48 and other compatible equipment such as a
printer, PLC, HMI, or a host computer. In multipoint applications (up to thirtytwo), the address number of each C48 on the line can be programmed from 0 to
99. Data from the C48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm output(s) may
be reset by sending the proper command code via serial communications. PC
software, SFC48, allows for easy configuration of controller parameters. These
settings can be saved to disk for later use or used for multi-controller down
loading. On-line help is provided within the software.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a
textured front panel and a clear display window. The front panel meets NEMA
4X/IP65 specifications when properly installed. Multiple units can be stacked
horizontally or vertically. Modern surface-mount technology, extensive testing,
plus high immunity to noise interference makes the C48 Timers extremely
reliable in industrial environments.
DESCRIPTION
The Model C48 Timer is available in Single or Dual Preset models. The
C48T features a 7 segment, 2 line by 6 digit reflective or backlit LCD display.
For the backlit versions, the main display line is red and shows the timer value.
The smaller secondary display line is green, and can be used to view the preset
values or output time values.
The C48 timer can be configured for a variety of different operating modes
to meet most timing application requirements. Twelve timing ranges are
available from thousandths of a second to hours and minutes. Decimal Points
are used to separate the time units (hours, minutes, seconds). Timing can be
cumulative or can reset and start upon each power cycle. “On Delay” or “Off
Delay”, “Single Shot”, “Repetitive auto cycling” modes are all supported.
The Timer can also be configured to Continue or Stop timing upon reaching
Preset. The display can be programmed to stop at the preset value (Reset to Zero
mode) or zero (Reset to Preset mode), or automatically reset to zero or preset
and hold. Once stopped, the timer can be restarted by manually resetting it, or
it can be programmed to restart when power is reapplied.
The C48 Timer has a Run/Stop Input, 3 programmable User Inputs, and a
programmable front panel function key. The Run/Stop and User Inputs can be
configured as sinking (active low) or sourcing (active high) inputs via a single
plug jumper. The user inputs and the front panel function key can be configured
to provide a variety of functions.
Four front panel push-buttons are used for programming the operating modes
and data values, changing the viewed display, and performing user
programmable functions, e.g. reset, etc. The C48T can be configured for one of
two numeric data entry methods, digit entry or automatic scrolling. The digit
entry method allows for the selection and incrementing of digits individually.
The automatic scrolling method allows for the progressive change of one
through all digit positions by pressing and holding the “up” or “down” button.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
DIMENSIONS “In inches (mm)”
PANEL CUT-OUT
1
Relay: Form A contact, Rating = 5 A @ 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load),
1/10 HP @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Relay Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles min. at max. load rating
Programmable Timed Output(s): User selectable output time resolution
0.01 Second Resolution: 0.01 to 99.99 seconds, ± 0.01% + 10 msec max.
0.1 Second Resolution: 0.1 to 999.9 Seconds, ± 0.01% + 100 msec max.
8. RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (Optional): Up to 32 units can be
connected.
Baud Rate: Programmable from 1200 to 9600 baud
Address: Programmable from 0 to 99
Data Format: 10 Bit Frame, 1 start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, 1 or No Parity bit,
and 1 stop bit
Parity: Programmable for Odd (7 data bits), Even (7 data bits), or None (8
data bits)
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
UL Recognized Component, File #E137808
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV50204 Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 2 Line by 6 digit LCD display; Positive image reflective or
negative image transmissive with red (top line) and green (bottom line)
backlighting.
Main Display: 0.3" (7.62 mm) high digits
Secondary Display: 0.2" (5.08 mm) high digits
Annunciators:
Value: PRS, 1, and 2
Output: 01 and 02
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Versions (C48CXXX0X):
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 9 VA max.
DC Power: 11 to 14 VDC @ 150 mA max. (Non PNP output models)
Note: Models with PNP current sourcing outputs must be powered from AC.
DC Versions (C48CXXX1X):
CONTINUOUS:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC; 5.5 W max.
AC Power: 24 VAC r10%; 50/60 Hz; 7 VA max.
Note: The +10% tolerance range on AC input voltage must be strictly
adhered to. DO NOT EXCEED 26.4 VAC.
PEAK (START-UP CURRENT):
AC or DC Power: 500 mA peak start-up current for 10 msec max.
DC OUT (VSRC IN) - Terminal 10
For units which do not have PNP current sourcing outputs, this terminal
provides a DC output for sensor power (+12 VDC r15%). The
maximum sensor current is 100 mA.
For units with PNP current sourcing outputs, this terminal serves a dual
purpose depending on the application’s PNP output voltage level and
current requirements.
1. The terminal may be used as a +12 VDC output for sensor power.
In this case, the PNP output voltage level will be +12 VDC
(r15%). A maximum of 100 mA is available for the combination
of sensor current and PNP output sourcing current.
2. If a higher PNP output voltage level or additional output sourcing
current is desired, an external DC supply may be connected
between the “DC OUT (VSRC IN)” and “COMM.” terminals. This
supply will determine the PNP output voltage level, and must be
in the range of +13 to +30 VDC.
An external DC supply can also provide the additional output
sourcing current required in applications where two or more PNP
outputs are “ON” simultaneously. However, the maximum current
rating of 100 mA per individual output must not be exceeded,
regardless of external supply capacity.
3. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
timer values.
4. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC (r 15%) @ 100 mA max.
5. INPUTS: Run/Stop, Usr. In1, Usr In2, and Usr. In3.
Configurable as current sinking (active low) or current sourcing (active high)
inputs via a single plug jumper.
Current Sinking (active low): VIL = 1.5 VDC max, 22 K: pull-up to 5
VDC.
Current Sourcing (active high): VIH = 3.5 VDC min., VIN max = 30 VDC;
22 K: pull-down.
Run/Stop Response Time: 250 Psec max.
User Input Response Time: 5 msec max.
6. TIME ACCURACY: r 0.01%
7. OUTPUTS: (Output type and quantity are model dependent)
Solid-State:
NPN Open Collector: ISNK = 100 mA max. @ VOL = 1.1 VDC max; VOH
= 30 VDC max.
PNP Open Collector: ISRC = 100 mA max.(See note); VOH = 12 VDC
±15% (using internal supply); VOH = 13 to 30 VDC (using external
supply).
Note: The internal supply of the C48T can provide a total of 100 mA for
the combination of sensor current and PNP output sourcing current.
The supply voltage is +12 VDC (±15%), which will be the PNP output
voltage level when using only the internal supply.
If additional PNP output sourcing current or a higher output voltage
level is desired, an external DC supply may be connected between the
“DC Out/In” and “Comm.” terminals. This supply will determine the
PNP output voltage level, and must be in the range of +13 to +30 VDC.
An external supply can provide the additional output sourcing current
required in applications where two or more outputs are “ON”
simultaneously. However, the maximum rating of 100 mA per individual
output must not be exceeded, regardless of external supply capacity.
Notes:
AC VERSIONS
1. A power line filter, RLC#LFIL0000 or equivalent, was installed when the
unit was DC powered.
DC VERSIONS
To insure compliance with the EMC standards listed above, do not connect
any wires from the terminal(s) labeled “COMM.” to the “DC-” supply
terminal (12), when powering the unit from a DC supply.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
10.ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0°C to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40°C to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
11. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION: Wire clamping screw terminals.
12. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic case with collar style panel latch. The
panel latch can be installed for horizontal or vertical stacking. Black plastic
textured bezel with clear display viewing window. Unit assembly with circuit
boards can be removed from the case without removing the case from the
panel or disconnecting the wiring. This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65
indoor use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
13. WEIGHT: 6.0 oz. (170 g)
SINGLE PRESET MODELS
The C48TS offers a choice of twelve timing ranges with eighteen different
operating modes. The unit has a solid-state output that operates in parallel with
a relay output. The solid-state output is available as an NPN or PNP open
collector transistor.
DUAL PRESET MODELS
The C48TD offers a choice of twelve timing ranges with 42 operating modes.
The unit is available with solid-state or relay outputs. The solid-state outputs are
available as NPN or PNP open collector transistors.
2
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
The C48 Timer features a dual line display. In
the normal operating mode (main display), the
timer value is shown on the top line and preset or
output time values are shown on the bottom line.
The Presets or Output time values can be
programmed to be viewable only, viewable and
changeable, or locked (not viewable) from the
main display.
In the normal operating mode, the presets and
output time values are accessible providing that
these values are not programmed for ‘L’ocked.
Values that are accessible (changeable) can be
changed immediately when viewed in the
secondary display.
FRONT PANEL KEYPAD
USER INTERFACE/PROGRAMMING MODES
The operating modes of the C48T are programmed using the front panel
keypad. To enter the programming menu, the key is pushed and held for 2
seconds. Within the programming menu, the key is used to sequence through
the list of programming parameters.
- Performs user Programmed Function
- Selects next available mode in programming mode.
- Increments digit in Digit Entry mode.
- Increments value in Auto Scrolling entry mode.
- Selects Data Entry mode for displayed data values.
- Selects Digit to right when in Digit Entry mode.
- Decrements value in Auto Scrolling entry mode.
PROGRAMMING MENU
DISPLAY
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
- Cycles through secondary displays.
- Enters Programming Mode or Protected Value Menu
when pushed and held for 2 seconds.
- Scrolls through programming displays.
- Enters Data Values.
-
Digit or Auto Scrolling Data Entry Mode
-
Timer Range Modes (See Table on following page)
-
Timer Operating Modes (See Table on following page)
-
Reset at Power up
-
Accessibility of Preset Values
-
Preset 1 and 2 Values
-
P1 Track P2 (C48TD only)
-
Accessibility of Output Time Values
-
Output Resolution
Program Security/Operator Accessible Values
-
Output 1 and 2 Time Values
-
Reverse Output/Relay Logic
-
Reverse Output Annunciator Logic
-
Power up Output State
The Program Disable Plug Jumper, Programmable Code Value, User
Input (programmed for Program Disable), and the Accessible value
parameter settings provide various levels of security against unauthorized
programming changes. The accessible value parameters provide individual
access or locking of each value.
-
User Input 1
-
User Input 2
-
User Input 3
-
User F1 Key
-
Programming/Protected Parameter Menu Code
-
Scroll Display
-
Serial Baud Rate and Parity Settings
-
Serial Unit Address
-
Abbreviate Serial Mnemonics
-
Print Options
-
Print and Reset Time Value
-
Load Factory Default Settings
Protected Value Menu
The Protected Value Menu allows access to selected presets and timed
output values without having them viewable or changeable from the main
display. To enter the protected menu, the key is pressed and held, and a
programmed code value is entered.
Timer Range Modes -
The timer can be configured to operate in one of 12 time ranges. The table
below shows the various ranges available with the time resolution of each
range.
(RS485 option only)
MODE
3
RANGE
RESOLUTION
999.999 Seconds
0.001 sec
9999.99 Seconds
0.01 sec
99999.9 Seconds
0.1 sec
999999 Seconds
1 sec
999.999 Minutes
0.001 min
9999.99 Minutes
0.01 min
99999.9 Minutes
0.1 min
9999.59 Minutes.Seconds
1 sec
999.59.0 Minutes.Seconds.0
0.1 sec
99.59.59 Hours.Minutes.Seconds
1 sec
99.59.99 Hours.Minutes.00
0.01 min
999.59.9 Hours.Minutes.0
0.1 min
Programmable Operating Modes -
These modes determine the operational characteristics of the timer. In the
tables, 01 and 02 refer to Output 1 and Output 2 respectively.
SINGLE PRESET OPERATING MODES
1
- Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Output
2
- Manual Reset to Zero, Timed Output
10 - Stop Timer at 01, Manual Reset to Zero, Timed Output
11 - Stop Timer at 01, Manual Reset to Preset, Latched Output
3
- Manual Reset to Preset, Latched Output
12 - Stop Timer at 01, Manual Reset to Preset, Timed Output
4
- Manual Reset to Preset, Timed Output
13 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Zero, Latched Output
5
- Auto Reset to Zero, Timed Output
14 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Zero, Timed Output
6
- Auto Reset to Preset, Timed Output
15 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Preset, Latched Output
7
- Auto Reset to Zero at 01 End, Timed Output
16 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Preset, Timed Output
8
- Auto Reset to Preset at 01 End, Timed Output
17 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Zero at 01 End, Timed Output
9
- Stop Timer at 01, Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Output
18 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Preset at 01 End, Timed Output
1
- Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Outputs
22 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched
2
- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 Timed, 02 Latched
23 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
3
- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed
24 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, Latched Outputs
4
- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched
25 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 Timed, 02 Latched
5
- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
26 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed
6
- Manual Reset to Preset 2, Latched Outputs
27 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched
7
- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 Timed, 02 Latched
28 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
8
- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed
29 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, Latched Outputs
9
- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched
30 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, 01 Timed, 02 Latched
10
- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
31 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed
11
- Auto Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed
32 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched
12
- Auto Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
33 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
13
- Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed
34 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, Latched Outputs
14
- Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
35 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 Timed, 02 Latched
15
- Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed
36 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed
16
- Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
37 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched
17
- Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed
38 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
18
- Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
39 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed
19
- Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Outputs
40 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
20
- Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, 01 Timed, 02 Latched
41 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed
21
- Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed
42 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed
DUAL PRESET OPERATING MODES
MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING
The C48T is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel
latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum spacing
from center line to center line of the units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This spacing is
the same for vertical or horizontal stacking.
Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that the
maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.
PANEL CUT-OUT SPACING FOR MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING.
HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENT SHOWN.
PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR VERTICAL
UNIT STACKING
PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
HORIZONTAL UNIT STACKING
4
APPLICATION
ONE SHOT TIMING CYCLE
Proper wash down mixture for a food processing plant is an important
factor in maintaining the clean environment required. A disinfectant solution
is added to the mixing/holding tank used for the wash down cycle. When the
holding tank is near empty, a level transducer activates the filler pump. A
C48TS is used to turn on the disinfectant solution pump for a preprogrammed
amount of time during the filling process of the holding tank.
When the filler pump starts, a momentary contact closure activates User
Input 1, resetting the C48 Timer. The timer begins the timing cycle since the
run terminal is connected to common. The normally open relay contacts close
at the timer reset signal activating the disinfectant solution pump. When the
programmed preset is reached, timing stops and the relay deactivates, turning
off the pump controlling the disinfectant solution. The C48 Timer’s preset
cycle time may be changed according to the manufacturer’s concentration
level of the disinfectant.
PROGRAMMING
!
(min & sec)
(yes)
xxxx.xx
(yes)
(no)
(off)
xxxx
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
C48T
PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE
SUPPLY VOLTAGES
* NPN O.C.
OUTPUT(S)
RELAY
OUTPUT(S)
RS485
18-36 VDC/24VAC
85 to 250 VAC
1 Preset Timer, Reflective LCD
Yes
Yes
No
C48TS013
C48TS003
1 Preset Timer, Backlit LCD
Yes
Yes
No
C48TS113
C48TS103
2 Preset Timer, Reflective LCD
No
Yes
No
C48TD012
C48TD002
2 Preset Timer, Reflective LCD
No
Yes
Yes
C48TD017
C48TD007
2 Preset Timer, Reflective LCD
Yes
No
Yes
N/A
C48TD005
2 Preset Timer, Backlit LCD
No
Yes
No
C48TD112
C48TD102
2 Preset Timer, Backlit LCD
No
Yes
Yes
C48TD117
C48TD107
2 Preset Timer, Backlit LCD
Yes
No
Yes
N/A
C48TD105
DESCRIPTION
* PNP O.C. output(s) versions are available, contact the factory.
RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS
MODEL NO.
RBC48
DESCRIPTION
NPN O.C.
OUTPUT
PNP O.C.
OUTPUT
RELAY
OUTPUT(S)
PART NUMBER
Single Preset
Yes
No
Yes
RBC48001
Dual Preset
No
No
Yes
RBC48003
ACCESSORIES
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
SFC48
PC Configuration Software for Windows 3.x and 95 (3.5"disk) (for RS-485 Models)
5
SFC48
Bulletin No. CUB3T3/4-A
Drawing No. LP0395
Revised 9/00
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-6587
www.redlion-controls.com
MODEL CUB3T3 & CUB3T4 - GENERAL PURPOSE MINIATURE ELECTRONIC TIMERS
!
!
!
!
!
!
6-DIGIT TIMER ACCUMULATES TIME IN HOURS,
1/10 HOURS, 1/100 HOURS, OR 1/10 MINUTES
OPERATES FROM EITHER SWITCH CONTACT, OR
10 to 300 V (AC 50/60 Hz or DC) INPUTS
SELF-POWERED WITH INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY FOR UP
TO 7 YEARS OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION
AVAILABLE IN FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET OR REMOTE
RESET ONLY MODELS
EASY SNAP-IN MOUNTING IN 1" X 2" (25 mm x 50 mm) PANEL
OPENING
IDEAL FOR PORTABLE, MOBILE, OR STATIONARY INDUSTRIAL
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
The CUB3T’s are state-of-the-art products with Micro-Electronic
technology. They open up a wide variety of new timing application possibilities
that, until now, were economically impractical.
The CUB3T3 and CUB3T4 are designed to be used as hour, tenth hour,
hundredth hour or tenth minute timers. The timing function on both models can
be activated by either a contact closure or the application of 10 to 300 (AC
50/60 Hz or DC). Both models are equipped with a remote reset. The CUB3T4
has the additional feature of a front panel reset. Time is displayed on a 6 digit
LCD that will wrap around from a full display of “999999” to “000000” when
an overflow occurs. An indicator, located in the upper lefthand corner of the
display, will blink at 2 Hz whenever the timer is actuated. The front panel reset
feature of the CUB3T4 allows the user to periodically measure elapsed time.
The CUB3T3, on the other hand, is ideally suited for measuring total run time.
Application of the CUB3T is simplicity itself. Its rugged reinforced nylon
case snap-fits into a standard rectangular opening without screws or other
hardware. No external power source is required since the internal lithium
battery provides up to 7 years of uninterrupted service. In addition to these
advantages, the CUB3T offers integrated circuitry, embedded in a single
monolithic, silicon micro-chip.
1. DISPLAY: 6-Digit, LCD, 0.2" (5.1 mm) High.
2. POWER: 3 Volts supplied by a non-replaceable lithium battery. Nominal
battery life is 7 years. Battery life is dependent upon usage. Signal and reset
contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.
3. REMOTE RESET:
50 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V bi-polar output, an open
collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
VIH = 2.0 V min. (3 V max), VIL = 0.5 V max.
4. SIGNAL INPUT:
Contact Connections: Switch Contact or Solid-State Transistor Switch.
Contact burden 15 µamps max. A maintained closed switch will actuate
the timer.
10 to 300 V Connections: 10 V min. to 300 V max. (AC 50/60 Hz or DC).
Input current 0.5 mA max. Constant voltage applied to the inputs will
actuate the timer.
5. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
EN 61010-1, IEC 1010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control,
and laboratory use, Part I.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact 1
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O 2
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference
EN 55022
Enclosure class B
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
bulletin or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
CAUTION: Read complete instructions prior
to installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Metal panel must be connected to protective earth ground.
DIMENSIONS “In inches (mm)” & INSTALLATION
PANEL CUT-OUT
1” x 2” or 25 mm x 50 mm
PANEL THICKNESS
.05” to .125”
Notes:
1. For operation without loss of performance:
In static environments above 4 KV, typical anti-static precautions should
be observed before touching the bezel.
2. For operation without loss of performance:
Install 1 ferrite core, RLC#FCOR0000 or equivalent, to cables at unit.
OR
Route I/O cables in metal conduit connected to earth ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: -25 to +75°C
Storage Temperature: -30 to 75°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. RH (non-condensing) from 25°C to +75°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CONSTRUCTION: Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
8. ACCURACY: 0.025%
9. WEIGHT: 2 oz (56.7 g)
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS & INPUTS
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very
important and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome
installation. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in
an industrial environment.
All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation,
local codes and regulations. It is recommended that voltage connections to the
unit be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
The CUB3T’s can be supplied with input signals from mechanical switch
contacts or solid-state switches as shown in the diagrams below. Reed switches,
mercury-wetted contacts, snap-action limit switches, and silver alloy contacts
with wiping action are usually satisfactory choices for mechanical switch input.
Heavy “clapper-type” contacts such as used in contactors or large machine tool
relays, tungsten contacts, or brush type contacts are not recommended for the
low level switching used by the input to the timer.
To avoid injury to personnel or equipment, properly isolate all unused wires.
For example, wire nuts, closed end splices, or other types of wire terminators
should be used.
Warning: Connecting voltage to contact or reset inputs will cause damage to
the unit.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
10 to 300 V Voltage Connections
Warning: Any lead may be at hazardous live input potential.
External wiring and devices connected to the unit must be rated the
same as applied signal input voltage and be properly isolated from
Class 2 or SELV circuitry.
Contact Connections
Installation Environment
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
An equipment rental company charges customers by the hour for the
rental of forktrucks or other heavy equipment. To help determine the
amount of actual run time, a CUB3T300 is connected to a spare set of
contacts on the ignition switch of the forktruck. When the switch is in the
“RUN” position, the “Orn/Wht” and “White” leads of the CUB3T3 are
connected, which cause it to accumulate time in hours on the display. The
rental company simply resets the CUB3T3 by momentarily closing the
connection between the “Orn/Wht” and “Blue” leads before each rental
period. The normally open “REMOTE RESET” push-button (installed by
the rental company) is protected to prevent tampering by the customer.
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a neutral soap product applied to a
soft damp cloth. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the display.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdriver, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
reset button of this unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers.
A machine shop manager charges customers for machine time by the
hour. He is also interested in tracking machine run time vs. down time. A
CUB3T310 connected across the 115 VAC spindle motor of a drill press
will serve both purposes. A reading taken before and after each job will
indicate the actual machine run time in tenth hour increments. A reading at
the beginning and end of each shift will indicate total run time, allowing the
manager to evaluate production efficiency and down time.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated. Input
voltage must not exceed 3.0 VDC on contact input or
maximum rated voltage on voltage input to prevent
damage to the unit.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
NO.
Timer,
Timer,
CUB3T3
Timer,
Timer,
Timer,
Timer,
CUB3T4
Timer,
Timer,
DESCRIPTION
1 hr.; Remote Reset Only
0.1 hr.; Remote Reset Only
0.01 hr.; Remote Reset Only
0.1 min.; Remote Reset Only
1 hr. w/Front Panel and Remote Reset
0.1 hr. w/Front Panel and Remote Reset
0.01 hr. w/Front Panel and Remote Reset
0.1 min. w/Front Panel and Remote Reset
PART
NUMBER
CUB3T300
CUB3T310
CUB3T320
CUB3T330
CUB3T400
CUB3T410
CUB3T420
CUB3T430
Bulletin No. CUB5T-X
Drawing No. LP0628
Effective 11/05
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL CUB5T - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC PRESET TIMER
AND CYCLE COUNTER
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR RED/GREEN LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.46" (11.7 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z 7-DIGIT BI-DIRECTIONAL TIMING CAPABILITY
z 6-DIGIT CYCLE COUNTING CAPABILITY
z OPTIONAL RELAY OUTPUT MODULE
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS MODULE (RS232 or RS485)
z SELECTABLE TIMER RANGES AND OPERATING MODES
z ELAPSED TIMER AND PRESET TIMER FUNCTIONALITY
z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT PRESET OUTPUT
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The CUB5T provides the ultimate in timer flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional relay output and serial communications capability.
The meter functions as an Elapsed Timer or Preset Timer. It also has a built-in
Cycle Counter. The display can be toggled either manually or automatically
between the Timer and Cycle Counter values. With eight different input
operating modes and 18 selectable timer ranges, the meter can be programmed
for a wide variety of timing applications.
The CUB5T has an LCD display with 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits. The LCD
is available in two versions, reflective (CUB5TR00) and backlight
(CUB5TB00). The backlight version is user selectable for red or green
backlighting with variable display intensity.
The Timer has two signal inputs and eight input operating modes. These
modes provide level active or edge triggered start/stop operation. A Display
Hold mode will display the elapsed time for one cycle, while the next cycle
continues timing internally. The Timer Reset modes will automatically reset the
timer value when a time start edge is applied to the input. This allows sequential
timing cycles without having to manually reset the Timer.
In addition to the Timer inputs, a programmable User Input is available to
perform a variety of meter functions. All inputs are current sinking (active low)
and accept a variety of logic and open-collector output signal sources. Relay and
switch contacts can also be used as signal sources, when the software input
debounce filter is enabled.
The capability of the CUB5T can be easily expanded with the addition of a
field installable option module. When the CUB5RLY0 relay output module is
added, the meter becomes a Preset Timer. The Setpoint Output can be assigned
to the Timer or Cycle Counter values, and configured to suit a variety of control
and alarm requirements. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module (CUB5COM).
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
The CUB5T can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5T.
The MLPS1 is powered from an 85 to 250 VAC source and provides up to 400
mA to drive the meter and sensors.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.
1
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE
MODEL NO.
CUB5T
Optional Plug-in Cards
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
CUB5TR
Preset Timer and Cycle Counter with Reflective Display
CUB5TB
Preset Timer and Cycle Counter with Backlight Display
CUB5TB00
CUB5RLY
Single Relay Option Card
CUB5RLY0
RS485 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM1
RS232 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM2
CUB5COM
CUB5TR00
MLPS1
Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC
MLPS1000
CBLPRO
Programming Cable RS232 (RJ11-DB9)
CBLPROG0
CBPRO
Programming Cable RS485 (RJ11-DB9)
CBPRO007
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 8 digit LCD 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits
CUB5TR00: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5TB00: Selectable transmissive red or green backlight LED with
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability at preset when
using a relay module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a Class 2 or SELV
rated power supply.
MODEL
NUMBER
DISPLAY COLOR
INPUT CURRENT
WITHOUT
CUB5RLY0
INPUT CURRENT
WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5TR00
CUB5TB00
CUB5TB00
--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)
10 mA
85 mA
95 mA
30 mA
115 mA
125 mA
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TR00: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TB00 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL
Red Display
Green Display
1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5
TEMPERATURE
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C
Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure Rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
3. TIMER DISPLAY: 7-digits
Display Designator: “t” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 9999999
Overflow/Underflow Indication: Display flashes “t OVEr”
Minimum Digit Resolution: 0.001 Sec.
Maximum Single Digit Resolution: 1 Hr.
Timing Accuracy: ±0.01%
4. CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be disabled if not used
Display Designator: “C” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Overflow/Underflow Indication: Display flashes “C
OVEr”
Maximum Count Rate:
All Count Sources except Input B: 10 Hz
Input B Count Source:
With Timer Input Filter ON: 10 Hz
With Timer Input Filter OFF: 500 Hz
5. TIMER SIGNAL INPUTS (INP A and INP B)
Logic Inputs, Current Sinking (active low)
Input A:
Internal 7.8KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.25 V max; VIH = 2.75 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Input B:
Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Inputs A and B:
Timer Input Pulse Width: 1 msec min.
Timer Start/Stop Response Time: 1 msec max.
Filter: Software filtering provided for relay or switch contact debounce.
Filter enabled or disabled through programming. If enabled, results in
50 msec start/stop response time for successive pulses applied to the
same input terminal.
6. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable function input
Logic Input, Current Sinking (active low)
Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and timer/counter values when power is removed.
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
12. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)
2
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the meter before
installing Plug-in card.
The CUB5T meters can be fitted with optional relay card and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable. 2 msec min. or 50 msec min.
RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.
Time Accuracy: ± 0.01%
1.0 INSTALLING
THE
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
METER
INSTALLATION
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approx. 28 to 36 in-oz [0.202 to 0.26 N-m]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel cutout.
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices that
generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
2.0 DIP SWITCHES
The DIP switches on the main circuit board are not used with the CUB5T and
must be left in the factory set position (all down). Setting any switch to the up
position may cause improper operation of the meter.
3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter after the rear
cover is removed
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the meter before
installing Plug-in Card.
Comms Card
Relay Card
REMOVING THE REAR COVER
To remove the rear cover, locate the cover locking tab below the 2nd and 3rd
input terminals. To release the tab, insert a small, flat blade screwdriver between
the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Inserting the screwdriver will
provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.
4.0 WIRING
THE
CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge static
charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal object.
Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean workstation. Also,
only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or other contaminants
that may contact the cards can adversely affect circuit operation.
METER
WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed
(stranded wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct
screw-clamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
4
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.1 POWER WIRING
4.2 USER INPUT WIRING
DC Power
Sinking Logic
+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC
INP COMM
USR
}
Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and Input Common.
The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low.
4.3 INPUT WIRING
CAUTION: Power input common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the power input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential
of the user input common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the plug-in cards with respect to input common.
Current Sinking Output
Interfacing With TTL
Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink
Input A
Input A
Input A
4.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD
RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS
5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.0 REVIEWING
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
KEY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
ENTERING PROGRAM MODE
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
SEL
Select display (timer or cycle counter)
Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
RST
Reset value(s) per Front Panel Reset setting
OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“t” - To the left of the display is the timer value.
“C” - To the left of the display is the cycle counter value.
Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection
“1” - To the upper left of the display indicates the setpoint status.
If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between the timer and cycle counter values.
6.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL KEY)
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL KEY)
It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL key. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock (See Module 3).
The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the SEL key with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)
PROGRAMMING TIPS
MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST KEYS)
It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module
in sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user
input or programming security code.
The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST key is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL key.
FACTORY SETTINGS
MODULE MENU (SEL KEY)
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 3. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.
Pressing the RST key on power-up will load the factory settings and display
rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a memory failure or corrupted data.
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The SEL key is pressed to advance to a particular parameter
to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding parameters.
After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO. Programming
may continue by accessing additional modules.
ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.
SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST key is used to move through the
selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL key, stores and activates the
displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST key to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST key again increments the digit
by one or the user can hold the RST key and the digit will automatically scroll.
The SEL key will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the SEL key
will enter the value and move to the next parameter.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter
INPUtsOP «
ª
LEVEL
Selection/Value
Factory Settings are shown.
6
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.1 MODULE 1 - TIMER INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INPUt)
PARAMETER MENU
TIMER INPUT FILTER
TIMER RANGE
«
RANGE
ª 5555555
18 TIMER RANGE SELECTIONS
(S
= SEC;
N
= MIN;
H
d
= HR;
= DAY))
FILtEr
«
ª
ON
ON
OFF
Provides a 50 msec software debounce for the Timer Inputs (A and B). Select
RANGE
MAXIMUM
SELECTION DISPLAY
DISPLAY
RESOLUTION
RANGE
SELECTION
MAXIMUM
DISPLAY
DISPLAY RESOLUTION
ON when using relays or switch contacts as a signal source.
MINUTES/SECONDS
SECONDS
5555555
555555.5
55555.55
5555.555
1 SEC
9999999
999999.9
99999.99
9999.999
0.1 SEC
0.01 SEC
0.001 SEC
MINUTES
NNNNNNN
NNNNNN.N
NNNNN.NN
1 MIN
9999999
999999.9
99999.99
0.1 MIN
0.01 MIN
NNNNN.SS
NNNN.SS.S
NNN.SS.SS
HHHHHHH
HHHHHH.H
HHHHH.HH
1 HR
9999999
999999.9
99999.99
0.1 HR
TIMING DIRECTION
0.1 SEC
0.01 SEC
HOURS/MINUTES
HHHHH.NN
HHHH.NN.N
HHH.NN.NN
1 MIN
99999.59
9999.59.9
999.59.99
0.1 MIN
ª
UP
ddd.HH.NN
Ed9E-2
Ed-2srSt
HOLd-2
HOLdsrSt
TIMER STOP VALUE
t-StOP
«
ª
NO
Time Time
Stop Start
StOP VAL «
ª 0000000
Edge Triggered Operation -1 Input
Time
Stop
Time
Start
Time
Stop
INPUT A
INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)
INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)
Ed9E-2, Ed-2srSt
t-FLASH
ª
Time
Start
INPUT A
Time Start,
Display Update
RunsP-UP «
ª
StOP
Display
Update
INPUT A
Time
Stop
YES
NO
YES
TIMER RUN STATE AT POWER-UP
Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input,
with Display Hold
Time Start,
Display Update
«
Select YES to have the timer annunciator (t) flash when the timer is running.
HOLd-2, HOLdsrSt
Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input
INPUT B
0000000 to 9999999
FLASH TIMER ANNUNCIATOR
Time
Stop
Time
Start
INPUT A
Time
Stop
YES
Ed9E-1, Ed-1srSt
Level Active (Gated) Operation
Time
Start
NO
The Timer stops when this value is reached regardless of the signal levels on
the timer inputs. Selecting YES displays a sub-menu where the Stop Value is
entered in the same display format as the Timer Range selected. This stop
condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs or another start edge is applied
on the timer input. Select NO if a Stop Value is not desired.
For Reset Modes (rSt), the timer is reset at Time Start edge.
Time
Start
0000000 to 9999999
The Timer returns to this value whenever a Timer Reset occurs. The value is
entered in the same display format as the Timer Range selected. Non-zero
values are normally used for “timing down” applications, but they can also
provide an offset value when timing up.
This parameter determines how the Timer Input Signals affect the Run/Stop
status of the Timer. Timing diagrams are shown below for level active and edge
triggered (1-input or 2-input) operation. For single input modes (Input A only),
Input B provides a level active Timer Inhibit function. In the Display Hold
mode, the timer display value remains held and only updates when a Timer
Start (Input A) or Timer Stop (Input B) edge occurs.
The timer reset (rSt) operating modes are identical to the other modes in the
diagrams, except the timer display value is reset at the Time Start edges.
The Timer can also be stopped at a Timer Stop Value or at Setpoint output
activation or deactivation. This type of Stop condition is cleared when a Timer
Reset occurs, or another start edge is applied on the timer input.
LEVEL, LEVsrSt
dn
TIMER START VALUE
1 MIN
999.23.59
t-Strt «
ª 0000000
Ed9E-1
Ed-1srSt
UP
1 SEC
999.59.59
TIMER INPUT OPERATION
LEVEL
LEVsrSt
«
DAYS/HOURS/MINUTES
0.01 HR
INPUtsOP «
ª LEVEL
t-dir
Bi-directional timing capability. Select the timing direction desired for the
application.
0.01 MIN
HOURS/MINUTES/SECONDS
HHH.NN.SS
HOURS
1 SEC
99999.59
9999.59.9
999.59.99
StOP
SAVE
Determines the Run/Stop state of the Timer at Power-up. This parameter
does not apply to LEVEL Input Operation.
StOP - Timer Stopped at power-up, regardless of prior Run/Stop state
SAVE - Timer assumes the Run/Stop state it was in prior to power-down
Time Stop,
Display Update
INPUT B
7
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
USER INPUT FUNCTION (Cont’d)
TIMER RESET AT POWER-UP
RStsP-UP «
ª
YES
NO
YES
The Timer can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.
«
ª
NO
DISPLAY
MODE
DESCRIPTION
NO
Pro Loc
d-SELECt
rESEt
No Function
User Input disabled.
d-HOLd
Display Hold
Freeze display for the selected
value(s) while allowing time or
counts to accumulate internally.
Hold and Reset
Edge triggered reset of the
selected value(s) after
storing the time or count.
HOLd-rSt
See Programming Mode
Access chart (Module 3).
Toggle display with each
activation.
Level active reset of the
selected value(s).
Program Mode Lock-out
Display Select
(Edge triggered)
Maintained Reset
MODE
DESCRIPTION
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit timing or counting for the
selected value(s).
d-LEVEL
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Increase intensity one level
for each activation. (backlight
version only)
Print Request
Serial transmit of the active
parameters selected in the Print
Options menu (Module 5).
Prnt-r5t
Print and Reset
Same as Print Request followed
by a momentary reset of the
selected value(s).
r5t OUt
Reset Output
Edge triggered deactivation of
the Setpoint Output.
Print
USER INPUT FUNCTION
USErsINP
DISPLAY
USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT
t-VALUE
C-VALUE
both t-C
USErsASN «
ª t-VALVE
The User Input Assignment only applies if the cycle counter is enabled and
a selection of reset, display hold, hold and reset, inhibit, or print and reset is
selected in the User Input Function menu.
6.2 MODULE 2 - CYCLE COUNTER PARAMETERS (2-Count)
PARAMETER MENU
CYCLE COUNTER ENABLE
CntsEnb
ª
«
YES
NO
CYCLE COUNTER COUNTING DIRECTION
YES
Cntsdir
«
ª
UP
CYCLE COUNTER COUNT SOURCE
INPUtsb
USrsINP
t-rESEt
dn
Bi-directional counting capability. Select the counting direction desired for
the application.
When set to NO, the remaining Cycle Counter parameters are not accessible.
CntsSrc «
ª t-rESEt
UP
CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE
CntsStrt «
ª
000000
OUt-ON
OUt-OFF
000000
to
999999
The Cycle Counter returns to this value whenever a Counter Reset occurs.
Non-zero values are normally used for “down counting” applications, but can
also provide an offset value when counting up.
This parameter selects the source from which the Cycle Counter derives
counts. The Timer Reset (t-rESEt) selection generates a count when either a
manual or automatic timer reset occurs (See Module 4 for programming
Automatic Reset). The Input B (INPUt b) selection generates a count each time
Input B is activated. This selection overrides the timer inhibit function of Input
B, when the timer is programmed for Level or Edge-1 operating mode (See
Module 1 for Timer Input Operating Modes).
The User Input (USr1NP) selection generates a count each time the User Input
is activated. When selected as the count source, the User Input can still be set
to perform a User Function described in Module 1. In this case, the Cycle
Counter will count the number of times the selected User Function occurred.
The Output ON/OFF selections generate a count when the Setpoint output
either activates or deactivates. These selections will only generate counts when
an optional Setpoint module is installed.
CYCLE COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP
RStsP-UP
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
The Cycle Counter can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.
8
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY
AND
FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (3-dSPLAY)
PARAMETER MENU
PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)
«
SELsEnb
ª
yES
yES
ProsCodE
NO
ª
The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle between the timer and cycle
counter displays.
ª
«
YES
yES
NO
NO
t-VALUE
C-VALUE
000
0
to
999
The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (Pro Loc) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
the Setpoint values and Timer Stop value to be modified, but allows direct
access to these values without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the Pro CodE prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending
on the code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the Pro CodE
prompt appears (see chart).
FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)
RStsEnb
«
both t-C
dSPLAy
The yES selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s). The
shaded selections only appear if the cycle counter is enabled.
USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
KEY IS PRESSED
DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE
d-ScroLL
«
ª
NO
not
yES
______
Pro Loc
NO
The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll between the timer
and cycle counter values. The scroll rate is about every 4 seconds.
0
Full Programming
Immediate Access
1-99
Quick
Programming
After Quick Programming
with correct code entry at
Pro CodE prompt *
100-999
Pro CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *
0
Active
1-99
Pro Loc
DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
d-COLOr
ª
«
rEd
rEd
Not Active
FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS
Programming
Lock
Quick
Programming
No Access
No Access
100-999
Pro CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *
0-999
Full Programming
Immediate Access
* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.
6rn
Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
d-LEVEL
ª
«
1
to
FACtsSEt
«
ª
MO
NO
yES
The yES selection will return the meter to the factory default settings. The
meter will display rESEt and then return to Pro, at which time all settings have
been changed.
Pressing the RST key on power-up will load the factory settings and display
rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a memory failure or corrupted data.
5
5
Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.
9
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SEtPt)
PARAMETER MENU
The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when the optional relay
module is installed in the meter. Some parameters will not appear depending on
the Setpoint Assignment and Setpoint Output Action selected.
SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT
SPtstOUt «
ª
00.01.00
t-VALUE
C-VALUE
Select the display for Setpoint assignment.
LAtCH
t-OUt
ON-OFF
LAtCH
t-OUt
ON-OFF
OUTPUT ACTIVATES
StOP-t
«
ª
NO
NO
Out-ON
Out-OFF
Stops the Timer when the Setpoint output activates (OUt-ON) or deactivates
(OUt-OFF). Select NO if the output should not affect the Timer Run/Stop status.
The Timer Stop condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs, or a Time
Start edge is applied on the Timer input.
This parameter selects the action of the Setpoint output as shown below.
SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION
99.59.99
STOP TIMER
SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION
SPtsACt «
ª
LAtCH
to
This parameter is only active if the Setpoint Action is set to Timed Output
mode (t-OUt). Enter the time duration the Setpoint Output will remain ON once
it is activated. This value is always entered in minutes, seconds, and hundredths
of seconds format. The maximum value is 99 minutes 59.99 seconds.
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
SPtsASN «
ª t-VALUE
00.00.01
OUTPUT DEACTIVATES
At Manual Reset
When Time or Count
Latched Output Mode
(if SPt rSt = YES)
= Setpoint On value
When Time or Count
After Setpoint
Timed Output Mode
= Setpoint On value
Output Time-Out
When Time or Count When Time or Count
On-Off Output Mode
= Setpoint On value = Setpoint Off value
TIMER/COUNTER AUTO RESET
AUtOsrSt
«
ª
NO
NO
Out-ON
Out-OFF
Automatically resets the Setpoint Assigned display value when the Setpoint
Output activates (OUt-ON) or deactivates (OUt-OFF). Select NO if the output should
not cause a display reset.
SETPOINT ON
SPtsON
ª
«
VALUE
VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP
SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET
SPtsrSt
This parameter determines when the Setpoint output will activate. The output
can activate at a programmed Setpoint Value or can be set to activate when the
Timer starts (t-Strt) or stops (t-StOP).
Selecting VALUE displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint Value is entered. If
the Setpoint is assigned to the Timer, the value is entered in the same display
format as the selected Timer Range.
SPt VAL «
ª 0000100
SPtsOFF «
ª
VALUE
ª
YES
YES
NO
Select YES to have the Setpoint Output deactivate (reset) when the Setpoint
Assigned display resets. Reset can occur by the RST button or the User Input,
if programmed for that function. Select /0 if the Setpoint output should not
reset when the display resets.
0000000 to 9999999
CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/SETPOINT OUTPUT STATE
Ch-COLOr
«
SETPOINT OFF
ª
NO
VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP
This parameter enables the backlight CUB5T to switch the display color when
the Setpoint output activates. When the output deactivates, the display color will
revert to the normal operating mode color. This parameter is only active for the
backlight version.
The Setpoint Off parameter only appears if the Setpoint Action is set to OnOff Output mode (ON-OFF). In this mode, the Setpoint OFF parameter determines
when the Setpoint Output will deactivate. The output can be programmed to
deactivate at a Setpoint Off Value or can be set to deactivate when the Timer
starts (t-Strt) or stops (t-StOP).
Selecting VALUE displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint Off Value is entered.
If the Setpoint is assigned to the Timer, the value is entered in the same display
format as the selected Timer Range.
SPOF VAL «
ª 0000200
«
NO
YES
SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE
SPtsP-UP
ª
«
OFF
OFF
ON
SAVE
SAVE will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down. ON will activate the output at power up. OFF will deactivate the
0000000 to 9999999
output at power up. This parameter is not active when the Setpoint Action is
selected for timed output mode.
10
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (5-SEriAL)
PARAMETER MENU
Module 5 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the
CUB5T with those of the host computer or other serial device. The Serial Setup
Parameters are only accessible when an optional RS232 or RS485 serial
communications module is installed in the meter.
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
Abbr
ª
This section replaces the bulletin shipped with the RS232 and RS485 serial
communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using those
serial plug-in cards with the CUB5T.
«
ª
9600
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
ª
7-bit
Prnt OPt «
ª
NO
8-bit
7-bit
PARITY BIT
ª
«
NO
Odd
EVEN
DISPLAY
Odd
t-VALUE
C-VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP
Cnt Strt
SPt ON
SPt OFF
SPt tOUt
This parameter only appears when the Data Bit parameter is set to a 7-bit
data word length. Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial equipment
on the serial link. The meter ignores parity when receiving data and sets the
parity bit for outgoing data. If parity is set to NO, an additional stop bit is used
to force the frame size to 10 bits.
METER ADDRESS
Addr
ª
«
0
to
NO
YES
This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting YES displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as YES in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as NO will not be sent.
The “Print All” (Prnt ALL) option selects all meter values for transmitting
(YES), without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, the Cycle Counter and Cycle Counter Start values will
only be sent when the Cycle Counter is enabled. If disabled, these parameters
are inactive and will not be transmitted. Likewise, the Setpoint parameters will
not be sent unless an optional setpoint card is installed in the meter.
Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.
PAritY
NO
PRINT OPTIONS
DATA BIT
«
YES
19200
38400
Set the baud rate to match that of other serial communications equipment.
Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value that all of the serial
communications equipment is capable of transmitting and receiving.
dAtA
NO
This parameter determines the formatting of data transmitted from the meter
in response to a Transmit Value command or a Block Print Request. Select NO
for a full print transmission, consisting of the meter address, mnemonics, and
parameter data. Select YES for abbreviated print transmissions, consisting of the
parameter data only. This setting is applied to all the parameters selected in the
PRINT OPTIONS. (Note: If the meter address is 0, the address will not be sent
during a full transmission.)
BAUD RATE
bAUd
«
99
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
Timer Start
Timer Stop
Counter Start
Setpoint ON
Setpoint OFF
Setpoint Time-out
FACTORY
SETTING
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
MNEMONIC
TMR
CNT
TST
TSP
CST
SPT
SOF
STO
00
Enter the serial node address. With a single unit, an address is not needed
and a value of zero can be used (RS232 applications). Otherwise, with multiple
bussed units, a unique address number must be assigned to each meter. The
node address applies specifically to RS485 applications.
11
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sending Serial Commands and Data
Register Identification Chart
When sending commands to the meter, a string containing at least one
command character must be constructed. A command string consists of a
command character, a value identifier, numerical data (if writing data to the
meter) followed by a command terminator character, * or $.
Command Chart
Command Description
N
T
V
R
P
Notes
Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
one or two digit node address. Not required
when node address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by a register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value Change (write) followed by a register ID character and
numeric data.
Reset a value or the output. Must be followed
Reset
by a register ID character
Block Print Request Initiates a block print output. Registers in the
(read)
print block are selected in Print Options.
Node (meter)
Address Specifier
Applicable
Commands
ID
Value Description MNEMONIC
Transmit Details (T and V)
A
Timer
TMR
T, V, R
7 digit, per Timer Range
B
Cycle Counter
CNT
T, V, R
6 digit
C
Timer Start
TST
T, V
7 digit, per Timer Range
D
Timer Stop
TSP
T, V
7 digit, per Timer Range
E
Counter Start
CST
T, V
6 digit
F
Setpoint ON
(Reset Output)
SPT
T, V, R
per Setpoint Assignment,
same as Timer or Counter
G
Setpoint OFF
SOF
T, V
per Setpoint Assignment,
same as Timer or Counter
H
Setpoint
Time-out
STO
T, V
6 digit, mm.ss.ss format
Command String Construction
Command String Examples:
The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to illegal commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to the Setpoint On value
String: N17VF350$
2. Node address = 5, Read Timer value, response time of 50 msec min
String: N5TA*
1. The first 2 or 3 characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed
by a 1 or 2 character node address number. The node address number of the
meter is programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node
address itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a register ID character. It
prints all the active selections chosen in the Print Options menu parameter.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See timing diagram figure for differences in
meter response time when using the * and $ terminating characters.
3. Node address = 0, Reset Setpoint output
String: RF*
4. Node address = 31, Request a Block Print Output, response time of 2 msec min
String: N31P$
Transmitting Data to the Meter
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to Transmit Details listed in the
Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. The meter ignores any
decimal point and conforms the number to the appropriate display format. (For
example: The Timer range is set for tenths of a second and 25 is written to the
Timer Start register. The value of the register is now 2.5 seconds. In this case,
write a value of 250 to equal 25.0 seconds).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.
Receiving Data From The Meter
data within bytes 9 to 18 is right-aligned with leading spaces for any unfilled
positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with a <CR> and <LF>. After the
last line of a block print, an extra <SP>, <CR> and <LF> are added to provide
separation between the print blocks.
Full Field Transmission
Abbreviated Transmission
Data is transmitted from the meter in response to either a transmit command
(T), a block print request command (P) or a User Input print request. The
response from the meter is either a full field transmission or an abbreviated
transmission, depending on the selection chosen in Module 5.
Byte
Description
Byte
1, 2
2 byte Node Address field [00-99]
1-12
3
<SP> (Space)
4-6
3 byte Register Mnemonic field
7-18
12 byte data field; 9 bytes for number and three bytes for decimal
points
19
<CR> (carriage return)
20
<LF> (line feed)
Description
13
12 byte data field, 9 bytes for number and three bytes for
decimal points
<CR> (carriage return)
14
<LF> (line feed)
15
<SP>* (Space)
16
<CR>* (carriage return)
17
<LF>* (line feed)
21
<SP>* (Space)
* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
22
<CR>* (carriage return)
23
<LF>* (line feed)
The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register
mnemonic, leaving only the numeric part of the response.
* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12
characters long. When a display overflow exists for a requested timer or cycle
counter value, an * (used as an overflow character) replaces a space in byte 7.
Byte 8 is always a space.
The remaining ten positions of this field consist of seven positions for the
requested value with decimal points positioned for the selected timer range. The
Meter Response Examples:
1. Node address = 17, full field response, Cycle Counter = 875
17 CNT
875 <CR><LF>
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint On value = 250.5
SPT
250.5<CR><LF>
3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint On value= 250, last line of
block print
250<CR><LF><SP><CR><LF>
12
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Command Response Time
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. At the end of t3, the meter is
ready to receive the next command.
The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). During RS232 transmissions, the meter ignores commands while
transmitting data, but instead uses RXD as a busy signal. When sending
commands and data to the meter, a delay must be imposed before sending
another command. This allows enough time for the meter to process the
command and prepare for the next command.
At the start of the time interval t1, the computer program prints or writes the
string to the com port, thus initiating a transmission. During t1, the command
characters are under transmission and at the end of this period, the command
terminating character (* or $) is received by the meter. The time duration of t1
is dependent on the number of characters and baud rate of the channel.
t3 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
The maximum serial throughput of the meter is limited to the sum of the
times t1, t2 and t3.
t1 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies. If no response from the meter is expected, the meter is ready
to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character. The ‘*’ terminating character results in
a response time of 50 msec. minimum. This allows sufficient time for the
release of the sending driver on the RS485 bus. Terminating the command line
with ‘$’ results in a response time (t2) of 2 msec. minimum. The faster response
time of this terminating character requires that sending drivers release within 2
msec. after the terminating character is received.
Timing Diagram Figure
Communication Format
Start Bit and Data Bits
Data is transferred from the meter through a serial communication channel.
In serial communications, the voltage is switched between a high and low level
at a predetermined rate (baud rate) using ASCII encoding. The receiving device
reads the voltage levels at the same intervals and then translates the switched
levels back to a character. The voltage level conventions depend on the interface
standard. The table lists the voltage levels for each standard.
LOGIC
INTERFACE STATE
RS232*
RS485*
1
mark (idle)
TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V
a-b < -200 mV
0
space (active)
TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V
a-b > +200 mV
Data transmission always begins with the start bit. The start bit signals the
receiving device to prepare for reception of data. One bit period later, the least
significant bit of the ASCII encoded character is transmitted, followed by the
remaining data bits. The receiving device then reads each bit position as they are
transmitted.
Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The CUB5T meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.
* Voltage levels at the Receiver
Data is transmitted one byte at a time with a variable idle period between
characters (0 to ∞). Each ASCII character is “framed” with a beginning start bit,
an optional parity bit and one or more ending stop bits. The data format and
baud rate must match that of other equipment in order for communication to
take place. The figures list the data formats employed by the meter.
Stop Bit
The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single bit
period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of a
new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit. If 7 data bits and no parity is selected, then 2
stop bits are sent from the meter.
Character Frame Figure
13
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
This page intentionally left blank.
14
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Press and hold SEL key to
enter Programming Mode.
CUB5T PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
15
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship
for a period limited to two years from the date of shipment, provided the products have been stored,
handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The Company’s liability under this limited
warranty shall extend only to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s
option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with
respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against
damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales of RLC products or products
containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal injuries, deaths, property
damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be
to any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety
Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those
expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers and limitations contained
herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
Red Lion Controls AP
Red Lion Controls
20 Willow Springs Circle
Red Lion Controls BV
Basicweg 11b
31, Kaki Bukit Road 3,
#06-04/05 TechLink
York PA 17402
NL - 3821 BR Amersfoort
Singapore 417818
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Tel +31 (0) 334 723 225
Tel +65 6744-6613
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
Fax +31 (0) 334 893 793
Fax +65 6743-3360
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Bulletin No. CUB7T0-B
Drawing No. LP0648
Released 5/07
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL CUB7T0 PROGRAMMABLE GENERAL PURPOSE ELECTRONIC TIMER
O
O
O
O
O
C
U
L
R
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
10 PROGRAMMABLE TIMER RANGES
3 (8 Digit 0.35") LCD DISPLAY OPTIONS (Reflective, Red
Transmissive, Yellow/Green Transmissive) with “Timer Active”
annunciator
CONTACT INPUT
REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY (provides up to 6
years of uninterrupted operation)
BOTH FRONT PANEL PROGRAM AND RESET BUTTONS ARE
INDIVIDUALLY ENABLED
O
WIRE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE TERMINALS
O
FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET INPUT
O
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
The CUB7T0 is an 8-digit miniature programmable timer with large 0.35
inch (8.90 mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image
Reflective (CUB7T000), Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green
backlighting (CUB7T010) or red backlighting (CUB7T020). The backlight
versions require an external 9 to 28 VDC power supply. The display will wrap
around from a full display of “99999999” to “00000000” when an overflow
occurs. An annunciator, located in the upper left hand corner of the display,
blinks at 2 Hz when the signal input is activated. The CUB7T0 operates from
a switch contact or an open collector NPN transistor.
The CUB7T timers use a CMOS LSI chip, mounted on a gold-plated
substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding. Proven
micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these units
with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7T series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with
a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber buttons
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.
1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 6 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
Must use a NEC Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. ANNUNCIATOR: Annunciator in the upper left corner of the display flashes
at a 2 Hz rate when the signal input is activated.
5. SIGNAL INPUT: (LS terminal #4)
Contact Input (CUB7T0xx): Switch Contact or solid state Transistor Switch
to Common. Contact burden 15 µA max. A maintained closed switch to
COM will actuate the timer.
6. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
7. ACCURACY: 0.025%
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC (Backlight versions).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 5g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals.
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.15" (53.4) H x 3.00" (140) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
1
IEC-61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
INSTALLATION
The CUB7T meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed
panel. The viewing window and reset button are factory sealed for a
washdown environment. A sponge rubber gasket and mounting clip are
provided for installing the unit in the panel cut-out.
Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m
Installation Environment
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Level 3; 2 Kv power 1
Level 3; 10 V/rms
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the
maximum operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing
the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the push buttons of the unit.
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone
ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference
EN 55022
Enclosure class B
Notes
1. Backlit powered units require a power line filter to be installed, RLC
LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the
backlighting.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
11. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
12. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]
TIMER RANGE SELECTION
The CUB7T’s timer range can be modified in the Program mode. The
Program mode uses the PGM button (refer to photo) to switch between
Program and Operate modes. The RESET button (refer to photo) is used to
select the desired timer range.
Note: Timer range and accumulated time on the display will be lost if the
battery is removed from the unit
The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean
around panel opening.
2. Carefully remove and discard the center section of the gasket.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the counter body to the back of the
bezel. Install CUB7T unit through the panel cut-out.
4. Insert the mounting screws onto both sides of mounting clip. Tip of screw
should NOT project from hole in mounting clip.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the clip is against the
back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which engage
into mating features on the CUB7T housing.
6. Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip
into position.
7. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed
to about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
8. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that the mounting
clip is latched as close as possible to the panel.
9. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.
Connect wires between RST EN (Reset Enable) and COM. (Common); and
between HS (Program Enable) and COM. (Common) to enable front push
buttons. Press the PGM button to enter Program Mode, allowing selection of
the desired timer range. The display will show 00000.000 (Timer Range 0.001
sec). Repeatedly pressing the RST button will cycle through the available timer
ranges as shown in the table. When the desired timer range is displayed, press
PGM to load the range and return to
operating mode. (The CUB7T will
remain in Program Mode until the
DISPLAY DURING
Timer Range
PGM button is pressed.) Remove the
PROGRAMMING
wire from the HS (Program Enable)
00000.000
0.001 Sec
terminal to prevent accidental
111111.11
0.01 Sec
changes to the timer range. Any new
2222222.2
0.1 Sec
time accumulated will be at the new
33333333
1 Sec
rate selected.
Note: To avoid incorrect display
4444444.4
0.1 Min
information, it is recommended
55555555
1 Min
that the CUB7T be reset after
666666.66
0.01 Hr
making programming changes.
7777777.7
0.1 Hr
88888888
1 Hr
9999.99.99
Hr:Min:Sec
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.
2
BATTERY INSTALLATION
1. Remove all power to the unit before removing battery cover.
2. To remove the battery cover, push upward in the direction of the arrow on
the rear cover (See drawing at right), until the cover unlatches. Pull the
cover straight out from unit to fully remove.
3. Remove old battery* and replace it with an RLC battery (BNL10000).
Observe proper polarity when replacing the battery as shown in the drawing.
4. Replace the cover. The battery cover is keyed so that it cannot be placed
upside down. The arrow on the rear of the cover should point toward the top
of the CUB7T when properly installed.
* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. In extremely high EMI environments, additional measures
may be needed. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each
terminal. Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper function. Strip the
wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be
tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and tighten down the
screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two
#14 AWG wires.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.
L.S. INPUT; CONTACT VERSIONS
Reed switches, mercury wetted contacts, snap action limit switches, and
silver alloy relay contacts with wiping action are usually satisfactory for input
activation. Motor starter contacts, tungsten contacts, and brush-type contacts
should not be used.
Connecting the “L.S.” Input to Common with a mechanical or solid-state
switch activates the timer. Releasing the connection, deactivates the timer. The
switch load is 15 µA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The OFF-state
leakage current must be less than 2 µA.
3
RESET AND PROGRAM OPTIONS
BACKLIGHT OPTION
Connecting a wire from the RST EN (Reset Enable) or the HS (Program
Enable) Input terminals to Common will enable the front panel Reset or
Program buttons respectively.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the timer to reset. The “RST.” can be
pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch. The
Switch load is 15 µA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The OFF-state
leakage current must be less than 2 µA.
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.
Optional backlight versions of the CUB7T require an external 9 to 26
VDC power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and
common terminals as shown in the drawing.
APPLICATION
A bottling company has a preventive maintenance program based
on the accumulative running hours. For each bottling line, they added
a CUB7T000. When the line is running a contact closure is given to the
CUB7T timer allowing the new time to accumulate with the hours of
previous operations. At a designated value, the line maintenance is
performed and the CUB7T is reset with a key switch to 0.
LIMITED WARRANTY
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
*CUB7T
BNL
DESCRIPTION
CONTACT
INPUT
PART NUMBER
Timer; Positive Image Reflective
CUB7T000
Timer, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
CUB7T010
Timer; w/Red Backlighting
CUB7T020
Replacement 3 V Lithium Battery
BNL10000
*Battery is included with unit.
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and
workmanship for a period limited to two years from the date of shipment, provided the
products have been stored, handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The
Company’s liability under this limited warranty shall extend only to the repair or
replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s option. The Company disclaims
all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify
RLC against damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales of RLC
products or products containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon
personal injuries, deaths, property damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer,
its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be to any extent liable, including without
limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety Act (P.L. 92-573) and
liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act (P.L.
93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products
except those expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers
and limitations contained herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
Bulletin No. CUB7T1-H
Drawing No. LP0414
Released 11/06
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL CUB7T1 PROGRAMMABLE GENERAL PURPOSE ELECTRONIC TIMER
O
O
O
O
10 PROGRAMMABLE TIMER RANGES
3 (8 Digit 0.35") LCD DISPLAY OPTIONS (Reflective, Red
Transmissive, Yellow/Green Transmissive) with “Timer Active”
annunciator
REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY (provides up to 6
years of uninterrupted operation)
BOTH FRONT PANEL PROGRAM AND RESET BUTTONS ARE
INDIVIDUALLY ENABLED
O
WIRE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE TERMINALS
O
FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET INPUT
O
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
The CUB7T1 is an 8-digit miniature programmable timer with large 0.35
inch (8.90 mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image
Reflective (CUB7T100), Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green
backlighting (CUB7T110) or red backlighting (CUB7T120). The backlight
versions require an external 9 to 28 VDC power supply. The display will wrap
around from a full display of “99999999” to “00000000” when an overflow
occurs. An annunciator, located in the upper left hand corner of the display,
blinks at 2 Hz when the signal input is activated. The Voltage versions
(CUB7T1xxx) operate from a signal voltage of 10 to 300 V (AC 50/60 Hz or
DC).
The CUB7T timers use a CMOS LSI chip, mounted on a gold-plated
substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding. Proven
micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these units
with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7T series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with
a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber
buttons meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.
1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 6 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
4. ANNUNCIATOR: Annunciator in the upper left corner of the display flashes
at a 2 Hz rate when the signal input is activated.
5. SIGNAL INPUT: (LS terminal #4)
Voltage Input (CUB7T1xx): 10 V min. to 300 V max. (AC 50/60 Hz. or DC)
to Common. 150 V max. for backlight versions. Input current 0.5 mA max.
ANY off-state leakage current may activate the timer. Constant voltage
applied to the input will actuate the timer. Due to the internal digital
filtering to this input, up to 30 msec of error may be added per activation
of the signal input.
6. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
7. ACCURACY: 0.025% (+ up to 30 msec per activation of signal input—
CUB7T1xx only)
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC (Backlight versions).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only).
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
bulletin or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.5" (140) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
1
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
INSTALLATION
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Level 3; 2 Kv power 1
Level 3; 10 V/rms
The CUB7T meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed
panel. The viewing window and reset button are factory sealed for a
washdown environment. A sponge rubber gasket and mounting clip are
provided for installing the unit in the panel cut-out.
Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the
maximum operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing
the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the push buttons of the unit.
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone
ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference
EN 55022
Enclosure class B
Notes
1. Backlit powered units require a power line filter to be installed, RLC
LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the
backlighting.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
9. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals.
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max
10. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]
TIMER RANGE SELECTION
The CUB7T’s timer range can be modified in the Program mode. The
Program mode uses the PGM button (refer to photo) to switch between Program
and Operate modes. The RESET button (refer to photo) is used to select the
desired timer range.
Note: Timer range and accumulated time on the display will be lost if the
battery is removed from the unit
The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean
around panel opening.
2. Carefully remove and discard the center section of the gasket.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the counter body to the back of the
bezel. Install CUB7T unit through the panel cut-out.
4. Insert the mounting screws onto both sides of mounting clip. Tip of screw
should NOT project from hole in mounting clip.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the clip is against the
back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which engage
into mating features on the CUB7T housing.
6. Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip
into position.
7. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed
to about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
8. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that the mounting
clip is latched as close as possible to the panel.
9. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.
Connect wires between RST EN (Reset Enable) and COM. (Common); and
between HS (Program Enable) and COM. (Common) to enable front push
buttons. Press the PGM button to enter Program Mode, allowing selection of
the desired timer range. The display will show 00000.000 (Timer Range 0.001
sec). Repeatedly pressing the RST button will cycle through the available timer
ranges as shown in the table. When the desired timer range is displayed, press
PGM to load the range and return to operating mode. (The CUB7T will remain
in Program Mode until the PGM button is pressed.) Remove the wire from the
HS (Program Enable) terminal to prevent accidental changes to the timer range.
Any new time accumulated will be at
DISPLAY DURING
the new rate selected.
Timer Range
PROGRAMMING
Note: To avoid incorrect display
00000.000
0.001 Sec
information, it is recommended that
the CUB7T be reset after making
111111.11
0.01 Sec
programming changes.
2222222.2
0.1 Sec
33333333
1 Sec
4444444.4
0.1 Min
55555555
1 Min
666666.66
0.01 Hr
7777777.7
0.1 Hr
88888888
1 Hr
9999.99.99
Hr:Min:Sec
2
BATTERY INSTALLATION
1. Remove all power to the unit before removing battery cover.
2. To remove the battery cover, push upward in the direction of the arrow on
the rear cover (See drawing at right), until the cover unlatches. Pull the
cover straight out from unit to fully remove.
3. Remove old battery* and replace it with an RLC battery (BNL10000).
Observe proper polarity when replacing the battery as shown in the drawing.
4. Replace the cover. The battery cover is keyed so that it cannot be placed
upside down. The arrow on the rear of the cover should point toward the top
of the CUB7T when properly installed.
* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
WIRING CONNECTIONS
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. In extremely high EMI environments, additional measures
may be needed. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each
terminal. Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper function. Strip the
wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be
tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and tighten down the
screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two
#14 AWG wires.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.
CAUTION: All leads will be at the same line potential as the input
leads.
3
L.S. INPUT; VOLTAGE VERSIONS
The CUB7T accepts most machine control voltage signals. The input accepts
AC (50/60 Hz) or DC control voltages from 10 to 300 V. The unit times when
voltage is applied between the LS input and Common. Any off-state leakage
current may activate the timer.
WARNING: Any lead may be at hazardous live input potential.
External wiring and devices connected to the unit must be rated
the same as applied signal input voltage and be properly
isolated from Class 2 or SELV circuitry.
RESET AND PROGRAM OPTIONS
Connecting a wire from the RST EN (Reset Enable) or the HS (Program
Enable) Input terminals to Common will enable the front panel Reset or
Program buttons respectively.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the timer to reset. The “RST.” can be
pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch. The
Switch load is 15 µA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The OFF-state
leakage current must be less than 2 µA.
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.
BACKLIGHT OPTION
Optional backlight versions of the CUB7T require an external 9 to 26 VDC
power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and common
terminals as shown in the drawing.
WARNING: When connecting the wiring for a backlit CUB7T
measuring an AC input voltage, the neutral of the single phase
AC signal is connected to Terminal 1 (COM), and line (hot) is
connected to Terminal 4 (LS). The DC supply for the
backlighting is connected as shown in the drawing. Three phase
AC applications require an isolation transformer.
APPLICATION
A laundromat owner wants to monitor the cost of operating his dryers.
He needs to know how many hours each dryer has operated. A CUB7T100
(Voltage Input; Positive Image Reflective) is mounted on the back panel of
each dryer. The signal input is connected across the motor of the dryer. The
CUB7T will accumulate time while the dryer is running. On a regular basis
the owner records the cumulative
operating hours for each
dryer and calculates if
he needs to make any
necessary adjustments. The
timer can be reset via key
switch.
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the
appropriate company numbers listed.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
DESCRIPTION
*CUB7T
Timer; Positive Image Reflective
VOLTAGE
Timer, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
INPUT
Timer; w/Red Backlighting
BNL
Replacement 3 V Lithium Battery
*Battery is included with unit.
PART
NUMBER
CUB7T100
CUB7T110
CUB7T120
BNL10000
Bulletin No. CUBT-D
Drawing No. LP0278
Released 9/02
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion-controls.com
MODEL CUBT - SINGLE PRESET TIMER
!
FOUR TIMING VERSIONS AVAILABLE
Hundredths of Seconds
Hundredths of Minutes
Thousandths of Seconds
Thousandths of Minutes
!
EIGHT SELECTABLE MODES OF OPERATION
!
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY
!
TIMING ACCURACY OF 0.01%
!
SIMPLIFIED FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMING
!
ON LINE SELF-TEST (Including Relay Test)
!
REMOTE RESET CAPABILITY
!
LEADING ZERO BLANKING
!
FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE/DISABLE
!
NEMA 4/IP65 SEALED METAL FRONT BEZEL
Max. Current: 0.75 Amps
Operate Time: 0.5 msec. nominal.
Release Time: 0.3 msec. nominal.
Note: Relay output can switch an RLC DPDT relay P/N RLY30000 (115
VAC-10 Amp) or RLY40000 (230 VAC-10 Amp).
Programmable Timed Output: 0.01 sec. to 99.99 sec. ±0.1% + 10 msec.
4. TIME INPUT: Connect the white wire (CNT./TIM.) and black wire
(Common) of the five position connector. The unit times-out when the time
input is low.
Threshold Levels: VIH = 3.3 VDC, VIL = 1.0 VDC
Maximum Input Voltage: 30 VDC
Note: These units operate with VCM modules E through H. When using
VCM’s, set DIP switch position 1, ON to prevent false timing.
Timing Versions:
DESCRIPTION
The CUB Controller Timer is a versatile, compact, presettable timer. All data
set-ups are stored in a non-volatile internal memory, therefore when power is
removed all information is saved.
The CUB Controller Timer features eight different DIP switch selectable
timing modes. The output can be programmed via the front panel buttons for
various time durations.
The unit has a built-in self-test which checks the display driver and
microprocessor hardware. The self-test can be run at any time without losing time.
Power and Output connections are made at a terminal block at the rear of the
unit. The Input connections are made via a five pin polarized connector on the
bottom of the unit. This connector includes the timer input, remote reset, front
panel reset enable, and common.
The metal front bezel is designed to meet NEMA 4/IP65 specifications for
wash down and/or dusty environments when properly installed.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6-Digit LCD, 0.2" (5.1 mm.) high digits.
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
A.C. Power Versions: 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 VA.
230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 VA.
10 to 28 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 2.5 VA.
D.C. Power Version: 10 to 28 VDC, 1 W.
3. OUTPUT RELAY:
Type: Form-A.
Max. Power: 50 VA
Max. Voltage: 250 VAC/DC
DIMENSIONS In inches [mm]
Time
Maximum
Display
0.01 sec.
0.001 sec.
0.01 min.
0.001 min.
9999.99
999.999
9999.99
999.999
5. TIME ACCURACY: ±0.01%
6. REMOTE RESET: Blue wire must be inserted into the five position
connector.
Threshold levels:
VIH = 2.5V, VIL = 0.8V, VMAX = 5V.
Response time = 10 msec max.
Current Sinking: IMAX = 750 µA.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 2.77" (70.4)H x 2.77" (70.4)W.
1
PANEL CUT-OUT
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
7. MEMORY: Non-volatile E2PROM retains all
programmed information when power is
removed or interrupted.
Power Cycles (ON/OFF): 100,000 min.
8. OPERATION TEMPERATURE RANGE:
0° to 50°C.
9. STORAGE TEMPERATURE RANGE:
-20° to 60°C.
10. CONSTRUCTION: Metal front bezel that
meets NEMA 4/IP65 requirements for wash
down and dusty environments when properly
installed. Case body is black high impact
plastic (Panel gasket, mounting clips and
screws included with unit).
11. CONNECTIONS:
Power & Output: Terminal block at rear of
unit.
Input: Five position polarized connector that
plugs in to the bottom side of unit.
12. WEIGHT: 9.2 oz. (261 g)
SW1 ON - Connects a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce and
increases the response time to 20 msec.
Note: When using VCM’s to switch the time input, DIP switch position 1
should be placed into the ON position.
DIP SWITCH SET-UP
The DIP switches are under the cover at the rear of the unit. DIP Switch
position one determines the response time of the time input.
SW1 OFF - The maximum response time, at time input (CNT/TIM), is 1 msec.
DIP switch positions two, three, and four select one of the eight possible
operating modes, as described in the next section.
MODES OF OPERATION
There are eight available modes of operation which are determined by the
settings of the DIP switches.
A manual reset can be performed from the front panel “R” button if enabled
or by the remote reset wire. When the “R” button is pressed or the remote reset
is connected to common, the internal reset line goes low. At release of the reset,
the reset line goes high.
In the following modes of operation, the user should note the state of the
reset line for the relay output and timer display action.
Note: In modes three and seven, the output may appear to be latched if the time
delay is longer than the time required for the timer to reach the preset value
or zero.
Note: A manual reset will override the timed output and start the cycle again.
MODE 0 LATCH OUTPUT AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
MODE 2 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times up from zero to the preset value. When the
preset value is reached, the relay closes and the time continues
to accumulate. When a manual reset is performed, the output
opens and the timer goes to zero. At release of the reset, the cycle starts again.
The unit times up from zero to the preset value. When the
preset value is reached, the output relay closes for the time
programmed, and the timer continues to accumulate. A manual
reset causes the time to go to zero, and at release of the reset, the cycle starts
again.
MODE 1 ONE SHOT, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times up from zero to the preset value. When the
preset value is reached, the output relay opens and the time
continues to accumulate.
Note: When using this mode, a manual reset must be performed to close the
relay output. The relay output closes at the release of the reset.
When a manual reset is performed, the output remains open and the time
does not accumulate. At release of the reset, the relay output closes, the time
goes to zero, and the cycle starts again.
If power is removed before the count reaches the preset value, the relay
output does not close when power is restored, a manual reset must be
performed.
MODE 3 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO AT
PRESET
The unit times up from zero to the preset value. When the
preset value is reached, the output relay closes for the time
programmed. The timer will automatically reset to zero at the
beginning of the timed output and continue to accumulate time, as long as the
time input is low.
2
MODES OF OPERATION (Cont’d)
MODE 4 LATCH OUTPUT AT ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET
MODE 6 TIMED OUTPUT AT ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET
The unit times down from the preset value to zero. When zero
is reached, the output relay closes, the time rolls over to 9999.99
and continues to decrement. When a manual reset is performed,
the output opens and the time goes to the preset value. At release of the reset,
the cycle starts again.
The unit times down from the preset value to zero. When
zero is reached, the output relay closes for the amount of time
programmed, the time rolls over to 9999.99 and continues to
decrement. A manual reset causes the time to go to the preset value, and the
cycle starts again.
MODE 5 ONE SHOT, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET
MODE 7 TIMED OUTPUT AT ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET AT
The unit times down from the preset value to zero. When zero
is reached, the output relay opens, the counter rolls over to
9999.99 and continues to decrement.
Note: When using this mode, a manual reset must be performed to close the
relay output. The relay output closes at the release of the reset.
When a manual reset is performed, the output remains opened and the time
does not accumulate. At release of the reset, the output relay closes, the time
goes to the preset value, and the cycle starts again.
If power is removed before the time reaches zero, the relay output does not
close when power is restored, a manual reset must be performed.
ZERO
The unit times down from the preset value to zero. When
zero is reached, the output relay closes for the time
programmed. The timer will automatically reset to the preset
value at the beginning of the timed output and continue to decrement the time,
as long as the timer input is low.
INSTALLATION
Before installing the CUB Controller into the panel, the user should first
become familiar with the operation of the unit. Also, it may be desirable to
program the unit and set the appropriate DIP switches for the application.
When programming is complete, all parameters will be saved in nonvolatile
memory. The CUB Controller should be installed in a location that does NOT
exceed the maximum operating temperature.
The CUB Controller is designed with a high degree of electrical noise
immunity. However, installing the unit away from noise sources such as
relays, solenoids, motors, etc, should be considered.
The CUB Controller unit is designed to be panel-mounted with a gasket to
provide a water-tight seal. Two mounting clips are provided for easy
installation. Consideration should be given to the thickness of the panel. A
panel that is too thin may distort and not provide a water-tight seal, therefore
the recommended minimum panel thickness is 1/8" (3.2 mm). The
recommended clearance behind the panel for mounting clip installation is
2.77" (70.4 mm) H x 2.77" (70.4 mm) W.
After the panel cut-out is completed and deburred, carefully remove and
discard the center section of the panel gasket. Slide the panel gasket over the
back of the CUB Controller body, until it is against the back of the bezel.
Remove the two mounting screws from the CUB Controller metal housing.
These are at diagonal corners to one another.
Note: Do NOT remove the screws that are holding the plastic insert into the
metal housing.
Insert the unit into the panel opening as depicted in the drawing. Place the
mounting clips over the two screw locations, insert the screws and tighten
evenly to apply uniform compression, thus providing a water-tight seal.
3
WIRING CONNECTIONS
AC POWER WIRING VERSION
There are certain considerations that should be observed when running the
control signal wires. A length of wire can act like an antenna and the closer it
is to a source of electrical noise, the more it becomes susceptible to that noise.
There are a few rules that should be followed when running these wires.
1. The CUB controller Common may be connected to machine ground (earth)
only at one point, preferably a single, direct connection between a known
good, earth ground and the Input Common Terminal.
2. Never run control leads in the same conduit or race ways with conductors
feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, inductive loads, heaters, etc.
Ideally, control wires should be run by themselves in a separate conduit.
3. Control leads within electrical enclosures should be routed as far from
contactors, motor starters, control relays, transformers and their lead wires,
and other similar components as is possible.
4. When shielded wire is used, connect the shield to the common of the CUB
Controller, and leave the other end of the shield disconnected and insulated
from machine ground.
The AC power is connected to the two left terminals as viewed from the rear
of the unit. There are three A.C. version types available.
Note: Before applying power to the unit know the proper AC power voltage to
be connected. This can be done by comparing the part number on the side of
the unit to the ordering information.
CAUTION: On 10 to 28 VAC version unit’s, the input common on the five
position connector (black wire) is not isolated internally from the AC power
connection. When making connections externally be sure that input common
and AC power are isolated from each other, otherwise permanent damage to
the unit may occur.
To reduce the chance of noise spikes entering the AC line and affecting the
unit, the AC power should be relatively “clean” and within the specified 10%
variation limit. Connecting power from heavily loaded circuits or circuits that
also power loads that cycle on and off, (contactors, relays, motors, etc.) should
be avoided.
DC POWER WIRING VERSION
INPUT CONNECTIONS
The DC power is connected to the two left terminals as viewed from the rear
of the unit. The DC plus (+) power is connected to the left-most terminal and
the DC common directly to the right of the plus terminal. The DC power source
must be capable of supplying the unit’s rated power of 1 watt.
The five position polarized connector with three wires installed is plugged
into the pins on the bottom of the unit. There is a separate blue wire supplied in
the hardware pack that can be installed into the connector. Each wire has a
different color and a specific function.
Common (Black wire) - Other inputs are connected to common.
Reset Enable (Yellow wire) - Enables the front panel reset button “R” when
connected to common.
Remote Reset (Blue wire) - Performs a manual reset to the unit when
connected to common (Maintained reset).
Time Input (White wire) - The timer increments or decrements, depending on
the mode selected, when connected to common.
The blue wire (if required) should be inserted between the white and yellow
wire before plugging the connector into the unit.
Slide the connector body into the groove on the bottom side of the CUB
Controller until it seats into the pins as shown in figure B. Loop the wires over
the first tab and then under the second tab for proper strain relief.
Note: For quick reference, input wire labeling is shown on the top of the rear
cover.
OUTPUT WIRING
The normally open (N.O.) output relay is connected to the two right-most
terminals as viewed from the rear of the unit. Care must be taken to ensure that
the maximum rating specifications are not exceeded, as this will shorten the life
of, or permanently damage the internal relay.
If more power handling capability or varied contact arrangement is required,
use an accessory relay.
DPDT RELAY P/N - RLY30000 (115 VAC-10 Amp)
DPDT RELAY P/N - RLY40000 (230 VAC-10 Amp)
Socket P/N SKT10000 is required for each relay purchased, see Ordering
Information.
FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION
The front panel has a clear viewing window to view the six digit LCD
display. The front panel meets NEMA 4/IP65 requirements when properly
installed. The unit has three front panel buttons for control and data entering.
Each button’s function is described below.
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
R - The Reset button is active when the reset enable wire (yellow) is connected
to common (black wire). In any operating mode, a manual reset action will
occur when the “R” button is pressed.
The Reset button is used with the “E” button to initiate the self-test. Also,
it is used with the “P” button to enter the programming mode for the timed
output value.
P - The Preset button is used to view the preset value in the normal operating
mode. After release of the button, the preset value will be displayed, for
about 5 seconds.
When used with the “E” button, it allows entry into programming of the
preset value. Once in the preset programming mode, the “P” button is used
to advance to the next digit to be modified.
Also, it is used with the “R” button to enter the programming mode for the
timed output value.
E - The Enter button is used in the programming modes to increment the value
of the selected digit.
The Enter button is used with “R” button to initiate the self-test. Also, it is
used with the “P” button to enter the programming mode for the preset
value.
POWER & OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
The Power and Output electrical connections are made via screw-clamp
terminals located on the back of the unit. When wiring the unit, refer to the
stamping below the terminal block to identify the wire position with the proper
function. Strip the wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed
(stranded wires should be tinned with solder). Insert the wire into the screwclamp terminal and tighten the screw until the wire is clamped tightly. Each
terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG wire.
4
PROGRAM PRESET VALUE
SELF TEST
The factory default Preset Value is 5.00 for 0.01 sec. or min. version units
(0.500 for 0.001 sec. or min. versions). To enter a different value the operator
must enter the Preset Value Programming Mode by performing the following
steps.
Note: In the programming mode, the unit can continue to
accumulate time and activate the output.
The self-test feature can be activated without affecting the time. This test will
verify that the LCD digits operate. The DIP switch settings and relay operation
can also be checked.
To enter the self-test, perform the following (Front panel reset must be
enabled).
1. Press and hold the E button, then press the R button.
2. Release both buttons.
The display will cycle all the digits on the display each for about half a
second and in the sequence shown below. To rapidly advance through the
display routine, continually press and release the “P” or the “E” button.
1. Press and hold the “P” button and then press the “E”
button. The current preset value will be displayed with
the Least Significant Digit (LSD) flashing. Release both
buttons.
2. Press the “E” button to increment the value of the
flashing digit. Pressing and holding the “E” button will
continuously increment the digit. After nine is reached,
the digit goes to zero and starts over.
3. Press the “P” button to advance to the next digit which
will flash. Set the value of this digit by using the “E”
button. Repeat this procedure until all six digits have
been set to the desired value.
DIGITS CYCLED ON THE DISPLAY
000000
111111
222222
333333
444444
555555
666666
777777
888888
999999
BLANK DISPLAY
101010
121212
323232
343434
545454
565656
767676
787878
989898
After setting the most significant digit press the “P” button to enter the new
value (the unit automatically returns to the normal operating mode). The new
preset value is displayed and takes effect immediately.
In the Preset Value programming mode, if the “P” or “E” button is not
pressed within 15 seconds, the unit will return to the normal operating mode
with the previous value retained.
PROGRAM TIMED OUTPUT VALUE
The factory default Timed Output Value is 0.10 sec, but can be programmed
from 0.01 to 99.99 seconds. To enter a different value, the operator must enter
the Timed Output Value Programming Mode by performing the following steps.
The next portion of the self-test corresponds to the position of the DIP
switches. The four DIP switch positions are indicated on the display.
The most significant digit (MSD) corresponds to position one and the least
significant digit to position four of the DIP switches. The MSD will always be
a “1” regardless of the switch setting. The other three digits will be a “1” if the
switch is on or a “0” if the switch is off. Switches can be toggled at this stage
of the test and the display will indicate the change.
If the time input is low during the test, be aware that as the DIP switch
positions change, the timer mode operation matches the switch settings
immediately.
During the DIP switch test, the Output Relay Test can be performed. Press
and hold the E button to cause the Normally Open relay to close. Releasing and
pressing the E button can be performed as many times as desired. If the relay
was already closed, pressing the E button will not change the state, until the
button is released. If testing of the relay is not desired, press the “P” button to
exit self-test.
Note: If the relay test is not performed, the state of the relay will remain the
same as it was prior to self-test. If the relay is tested, the relay output will be
open after exiting self-test, regardless of the mode selection. A manual reset
should be performed if necessary.
CAUTION: The operator should know that the relay test will close the contacts.
Therefore, be aware of any hazardous or undesirable conditions in the
operating system.
The unit will automatically return to the normal operating mode if a DIP
switch or the enter button is not used within 15 seconds.
Note: In the programming mode, the unit can continue to
accumulate time and activate the output.
1. Press and hold the “P” button then press the “R” button.
The current time value will be displayed with the Least
Significant Digit (LSD) flashing. Release both buttons.
Note: The front panel reset button must be enabled.
2. Press the “E” button to increment the value of the
flashing digit. Pressing and holding the “E” button will
continuously increment the digit. After nine is reached,
the digit goes to zero and starts over.
3. Press the “P” button to advance to the next digit which
will flash. Set the value of this digit by using the “E”
button. Repeat this procedure until all four digits have
been set to the desired value.
After setting the most significant digit press the “P” button to enter the new
value (the unit automatically returns to the normal operating mode). The new
timed output value takes affect immediately, unless the timed output has been
activated.
In the Timed Output Value programming mode, if the “P” or “E” button is
not pressed within 15 seconds, the unit will return to the normal operating mode
with the previous value retained.
5
TYPICAL APPLICATION
CONTROLLING LENGTH OF PRESS TIME
A plywood manufacturer must control and vary the amount of time that his
in-line plywood press is closed. The loading and unloading of the plywood is
done manually on a conveyor belt system and the amount of time varies due
to width and height of the plywood. Because of this requirement, manual
activation of the press cycle is necessary. The time the press must be closed
is typically 40 seconds but varies according to the number of stacked
laminations (thickness). The Cub Controller Timer (seconds unit version) is
installed to meet these requirements.
As shown in the drawing, the time input (CNT./TIM.) is connected directly
to common. The output of the Controller is connected to a 230 VAC source
which is used to activate the coil of the accessory relay. One of the normally
open contacts of the accessory relay is used to activate the press control box.
The safety and start buttons are connected in series between the Controller
Remote Reset terminal and the Common terminal. The unit is set to mode 1
operation which is the one shot mode, manual reset to zero. The preset value
is set to 40.00 seconds or the necessary value for the plywood thickness.
Operation is as follows:
1. The operator loads the stack of glued plywood laminations into the
plywood press.
2. The operator momentarily presses both safety and start buttons at the same
time. This resets the Cub Controller to zero.
3. At release of the buttons, the Controller relay output closes.
4. The accessory relay activates and causes the plywood press to close and
stay closed until the Controller reaches its preset value.
5. When the preset value is reached, the relay output opens.
6. This deactivates the accessory relay opening the plywood press.
7. The press remains open until the operator presses the safety and start
buttons for the next stack of laminations.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO
PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE SUPPLY VOLTAGES
DESCRIPTION
230 VAC
10 to 28 VAC
10 to 28 VDC
115 VAC
CUB Timer/.01 sec
CUBT0010
CUBT0020
CUBT0030
CUBT0000
CUB Timer/.01 min
CUBT0110
CUBT0120
CUBT0130
CUBT0100
CUBT
CUB Timer/.001 sec
CUBT0210
CUBT0220
CUBT0230
CUBT0200
CUB Timer/.001 min
CUBT0310
CUBT0320
CUBT0330
CUBT0300
RLY
DPDT Plug-In Relay
RLY40000
RLY30000
SKT
Octal Base Socket
SKT10000
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.
6
This page intentionally left blank.
7
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship
for a period limited to one year from the date of shipment, provided the products have been stored,
handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The Company’s liability under this limited
warranty shall extend only to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s
option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with
respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against
damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales of RLC products or products
containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal injuries, deaths, property
damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be
to any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety
Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those
expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers and limitations contained
herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
Red Lion Controls
20 Willow Springs Circle
Red Lion Controls BV
Basicweg 11b
Red Lion Controls Asia
31, Kaki Bukit Road 3 #06-02 TechLink
York PA 17402
NL - 3821 BR Amersfoort
Singapore 417818
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Tel +31 (0) 334 723 225
Tel +65 6744-6613
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
Fax +31 (0) 334 893 793
Fax +65 6743-3360
BULLETIN NO. LIBT-H
DRAWING NO. LP0104
REVISED 11/98
MODEL LIBT - LIBRA SERIES TIMERS (LCD & LED)
l
ONE OR TWO PRESET VERSIONS
l
11 SELECTABLE TIME RANGES
l
0.5” (12.7 mm) HIGH LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY OR
0.4” (10.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAY
l
SOLID-STATE CURRENT SINK OUTPUT(S)
l
FORM C RELAY OUTPUT(S)
l
PROGRAMMABLE TIMED OUTPUT (0.01 sec to 99.99 sec.)
l
SIMPLE FRONT PANEL FOR PROGRAMMING EASE
l
MEETS DIN PANEL MOUNT SPECIFICATIONS
l
REMOTE RESET CAPABILITY
l
INSTANTANEOUS & DELAYED CONTACTS
l
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (E2PROM)
l
SEALED FRONT PANEL CONSTRUCTION (NEMA 4/IP65)
CAUTION: Read complete instructions prior
to installation and operation of the unit.
l
ABILITY TO LOCK OUT FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS
l
FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE/DISABLE
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
DESCRIPTION
The Libra Series of presettable timers is an economical and reliable solution
to one or two preset timing requirements. The LIBT1 and LIBT1E are the
single preset timer versions and the LIBT2 and LIBT2E are the dual preset timer
versions. All four units have a solid-state output and a form C relay output for
each preset. These units feature a full complement of control inputs,
programmable timed output values, non-volatile memory and many other
features which will satisfy most any single or dual preset timer requirement.
The Libra Timers have two main timing actions, Reset to Zero (RTZ) [Time
Up] and Reset to Preset (RTP) [Time Down]. With RTZ, the timer resets to
zero, times up, and activates the outputs when the preset value(s) are reached.
When RTP is used, the unit starts at the preset value, times down, and activates
the output when zero is reached (single preset unit). For the dual preset version,
the time starts at preset 2 and times toward zero. Output 1 fires when the preset
1 value is reached and output 2 fires when the time reaches zero. There are ten
modes of operation for the single preset unit and sixteen modes of operation for
the dual preset unit.
The Libra Timers also have eleven different selectable time range values.
These include: hours, minutes, or seconds; tenths of hours, minutes, or seconds;
hundredths of hours, minutes, or seconds; and two chronometer time functions
of minutes and seconds; and hours and minutes.
DIMENSIONS “In inches (mm)”
The timed output is programmed through the front panel buttons and can be
programmed from 0.01 sec. to 99.99 sec. (The unit’s timed output is set at the
factory to be 0.1 sec.) The Libra timers have an internal non-volatile memory
device which eliminates the need for battery back-up. When input power is lost,
this device will maintain all data necessary for system operation. A Program
Disable terminal is present, which is used to prevent accidental changes or
tampering by unauthorized personnel to the preset(s) or timed output value(s).
The front panel reset button can also be enabled or disabled by a rear panel DIP
switch. These timers also have an on-line self-test, which checks all display
driver and micro-processor hardware. The self-test can be run at any time
without losing time or missing preset value(s).
Power, input, and output connections are made via removable terminal blocks
located at the rear of the unit. These blocks can accept one #14 AWG stripped
wire. DIP switches at the rear of the unit are used to set the time ranges and to
set the desired operating modes.
The Libra Series timers have a metal die-cast front bezel, which is sealed, and
meets NEMA 4/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dust when properly
installed. Mounting clips are provided for easy panel installation.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 2.7”(69)H x 4.5”(114)W.
298
BLOCK DIAGRAM
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
EMC EMISSIONS:
Meets EN 50081-2: Industrial Environment.
CISPR 11 Radiated and conducted emissions
EMC IMMUNITY:
Meets EN 50082-2: Industrial Environment.
ENV 50140 - Radio-frequency radiated electromagnetic field
ENV 50141 - Radio-frequency conducted electromagnetic field 1
EN 61000-4-2 - Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-4 - Electrical fast transient/burst (EFT) 1
EN 61000-4-8 - Power frequency magnetic field
Note:
1. Unit required a line filter (RLC #LFIL0000) when DC powered. Apply DC
Power through the line filter to TBA terminals 4 (Comm.) and 5 (+12
VDC). Connect all other I/O Common returns to TBB terminal 6 (Comm.).
Test: EN 61000-4-4 EFT and ENV 50141 RF Conducted Immunity.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
11. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0oC to 50oC
Storage Temperature: -40oC to 70oC
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max (non-condensing)
from 0 to 50oC
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
12. CONSTRUCTION: Metal die-cast bezel with black, high impact plastic
insert. Front panel meets NEMA 4/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. (Panel gasket and mounting clips included with unit.)
Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2
13. WEIGHT: 1.5 lbs. (0.68 kg) [LCD], 1.75 lbs. (0.79 kg) [LED]
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY:
4-digit, 0.5” (12.7 mm) high LCD display.
4-digit, 0.4” (10.2 mm) high LED display.
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Operation: 115/230 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz, 6 VA (LCD) or 9 VA
(LED).
DC Operation: 11 to 14 VDC @ 0.2A max (LCD) or 0.3 A max (LED).
3. SENSOR POWER: 10 to 16 VDC @ 150 mA.
4. RUN INPUT: Can accept switch contact closure and NPN Open Collector
outputs and similar types of current sinking inputs. VIL = 1 V max.,
internally pulled up to 5 VDC through a 10 KW resistor (ISNK = 0.5 mA).
Response time = 5 msec to 15 msec. (These units operate with VCM [E-H]
modules.)
5. TIME ACCURACY: ±0.01%
6. CONTROL INPUTS:
Remote Reset: Active low (VIL = 1 V max.), internally pulled up to 5 VDC
through a 10 KW resistor (ISNK = 0.5 mA). Response time = 10 msec. A
low will reset the unit and deactivate the outputs.
Program Disable: Active low (VIL = 0.5 V max.), internally pulled up to 5
VDC through a 10 KW resistor (ISNK = 0.5 mA). A low will inhibit the
changing of presets and timed outputs, as well as the testing of outputs in
self-test.
7. OUTPUTS:
Solid-State: Current sinking NPN open collector transistors. ISNK = 100 mA
max. VOH = 30 VDC max. (Internal Zener diode protection). One solidstate output for each preset level. VOL = 1 VDC max. @ 100 mA.
Relay(s): Form C contacts max. rating 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC, 28 VDC
(resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load). The operate time
is 5 msec nominal and the release time is 3 msec nominal.
Relay Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. rating. (As load level
decreases, life expectancy increases.)
Programmable Timed Output: The timed output can be programmed from
0.01 sec to 99.99 sec, ±0.01% - 10 msec. The timed output is set for 0.1
sec at the factory.
8. MEMORY RETENTION: The Libra Timers have a “no power E2PROM”
which maintains all information when the input power is removed. The life
expectancy of this device is at least 10,000 power down cycles and length of
memory retention for a single power down can be as long as 10 years.
9. INPUT, POWER, AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS: There are two plugin, compression type, barrier strips located at the rear of the unit. These strips
can be removed from the rear of the unit for ease of wiring. After wiring is
complete, the connector can be plugged back into the unit.
SELECTION OF MODES OF OPERATION, TIME
RANGE VALUE, POWER-UP RESET, & FRONT
PANEL RESET
The selection of Modes of Operation, Time Range, Power-Up Reset, and
Front Panel Reset is accomplished by a ten-position DIP switch, located at the
rear of the unit, in the upper right-hand corner. DIP switches 1-4 are used to set
the desired mode of operation, while DIP switches 5-8 are used to determine the
time range setting. DIP switch 9 is used to determine whether the unit, on
power-up, is to restore or reset the time value. When this switch is up, the time
value, displayed before power loss, will be restored and will be operated on as
before power loss. When the switch is down, the unit will reset the time value
to either zero (RTZ) or to the preset value (RTP) when input power is restored.
DIP switch 10 is used to enable or disable the front panel reset button. When
the switch is up, the front panel reset button is disabled. When the switch is
down, the front panel reset button is enabled. The selection of Mode of
Operation will be discussed first followed by the selection of Time Range Value.
299
MODES OF OPERATION
Mode settings of the switches are shown to the right of the text below. The
mode number corresponds to a binary code, represented by the DIP switch
positions. When the switch is “UP”, it is equivalent to a zero. When the switch
is “DOWN”, it is equivalent to a one. The mode switch settings can be easily
observed from the panel front by using the self-test. Near the end of self-test,
the state of these mode switches are displayed.
MODES OF OPERATION FOR SINGLE PRESET LIBRA TIMER
MODE 0 LATCH OUTPUT AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO, TIME
STOPS AT PRESET (ACCUMULATING DELAY ON MAKE, TIME
UP)
MODE 8 LATCH OUTPUT AT ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET TIME
STOPS AT ZERO (ACCUMULATING DELAY ON MAKE, TIME
DOWN)
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, the output will
latch-on when the preset is reached. Also, the unit will stop timing
when preset is reached. When a manual resetP occurs, the unit
will Reset to Zero and the output if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as a DELAY ON MAKE timer, set the preset value to the desired
delay value. When “RUN” is at a low level, time will increment. The output
will activate when the preset is reached. To recycle use 1) reset, or 2) set the
power-up reset switch to enable, then remove and reapply input power.
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset, the output will
latch on when zero is reached. Also, the unit will stop timing
when zero is reached. When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will
Reset to Preset and the output, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as a DELAY ON MAKE timer, set the preset value to the desired
delay value. When “RUN” is at a low level, time will decrement. The output
will activate when the zero is reached. To recycle use 1) reset, or 2) set the
power-up reset switch to enable, then remove and reapply input power.
MODE 1 LATCH OUTPUT AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO, TIME
CONTINUES AT PRESET (ACCUMULATING DELAY ON MAKE,
TIME UP)
MODE 9 LATCH OUTPUT AT ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET, TIME
CONTINUES AT ZERO (ACCUMULATING DELAY ON
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset, the output will
latch on when zero is reached. Time will continue to accumulate
after zero is reached. When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will
Reset to Preset, and the output, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as a DELAY ON MAKE timer, follow the description under Mode
8.
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, the output will
latch on when the preset is reached. Time will continue to
accumulate after the preset is reached. When manual resetP
occurs, the unit will Reset to Zero, and the output, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as a DELAY ON MAKE timer, follow the description under Mode
0.
MODE 10 & 11 - PP
MODE 2 & 3 - PP
MODE 12 TIMED OUTPUT AT ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET, TIME
STOPS AT ZERO
MODE 4 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO, TIME
STOPS AT PRESET
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset, the output will
turn on when zero is reached. The output will turn off after its
programmed time value has occurred. Also, the unit will stop
timing when zero is reached. When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will
Reset to Preset. Manual resetP will terminate the timed output, if the output
is still turned on.
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, the output will turn
on when the preset is reached. The output will turn off after its
programmed time value has occurred. Also, the unit will stop
timing when the preset is reached. When a manual reset occurs, the unit will
Reset to Zero. Manual resetP will terminate the timed output, if the output is
still turned on.
MODE 5
MODE 13 TIMED OUTPUT AT ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET
AFTER TIMED OUTPUT (OFF/ON RECYCLING, TIME DOWN)
TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO
AFTER TIMED OUTPUT (OFF/ON RECYCLING, TIME UP)
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset, the output will
turn on when zero is reached. The output will turn off after the
programmed time value has occurred. Also, at the end of the timed
output, the unit will automatically Reset to Preset and start the cycle over.
Manual resetP will turn off the output, if turned on, and reset the time to the
preset value.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is equal
to the sum of the preset value plus the programmed timed output value. The
ON delay value is equal to the programmed timed output value.== When
“RUN” is at a low level, time will decrement. The output (ON delay) will
activate when zero is reached. The unit will recycle at the end of the timed
output.
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, the output will turn
on when the preset is reached. The output will turn off after its
programmed time value has occurred. Also, at the end of the
timed output, the unit will automatically Reset to Zero and start the cycle over.
Manual resetP will turn off the output, if turned on, and reset the time to zero.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is the
sum of the preset value plus the programmed timed output value. The ON
delay value is equal to the programmed timed output value.== When “RUN”
is at a low level, time will increment. The output (ON delay) will activate
when the preset is reached. The unit will recycle at the end of the timed output.
MODE 6 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO AT
PRESET = (OFF/ON RECYCLING, TIME UP)
MODE 14 TIMED OUTPUT AT ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET AT
ZERO = (OFF/ON RECYCLING, TIME DOWN)
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, the output will turn
on when the preset is reached. The output will turn off after its
programmed time value has occurred. Also, when the preset is
reached, the unit will automatically Reset to Zero and start the cycle over.
(The output will remain on until its time value has occurred.) Manual resetP
will turn off the output, if turned on, and reset the time to zero.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is the
preset value. The ON delay value is equal to the programmed timed output
value.== When “RUN” is at a low level, time will increment. The output (ON
delay) will activate when the preset is reached. The unit will recycle at the
beginning of the timed output.
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset, the output will
turn on when zero is reached. The output will turn off after its
programmed time value has occurred. Also, when zero is reached,
the unit automatically resets the time to the preset value and starts the cycle
over. Manual resetP will turn off the output, if turned on, and reset the timer
to the preset value.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is the
preset value. The ON delay value is equal to the programmed timed output
value.== When “RUN” is at a low level, time will decrement. The output (ON
delay) will activate when zero is reached. The unit will recycle at the
beginning of the timed output.
MODE 7 - PP
MODE 15 - PP
P - Manual reset, either by front panel reset (if enabled) or remote reset, is
= - The timed output value must be less than the value required to time from
always active, and will override any condition or state of the timer.
PP - These modes are not applicable to the single preset Libra timer (they
are used only for the two preset timer unit).
the reset condition to the preset point. Otherwise, the output will appear to
be latched on.
== - The maximum ON delay is 99.99 seconds.
POWER-UP DIAGNOSTICS
The Libra timers have internal diagnostics which will check the stored data
during power-up. When the data is saved (power-down), computations are made
with these values. The result of these computations is stored in the memory to
serve as a check against possible error. Then on power-up, these same
computations are repeated on the stored data. If these results do not agree with
the stored results, then a “P” will appear on the right side of the display. Normal
operation of the unit will continue while this “P” displayed. To remove the “P”
from the display, press the “E” button. Then check programmed values to be
certain they are correct.
300
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LIBRA TIMER
MODE 0 LATCH OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO, TIME
STOPS AT PRESET 2 (INSTANTANEOUS & TIME DELAY
CONTACT, TIME UP)
MODE 5 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO
AFTER TIMED OUTPUT 2 = (TWO LOBE OFF/ON RECYCLING,
TIME UP)
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, output 1 will latch
on when preset 1 is reached and output 2 will latch on when preset
2 is reached. The unit will stop timing when preset 2 is reached.
This mode also has an input tracking feature (INSTANTANEOUS
CONTACT) where if preset 1 is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the
input is activated, and it will turn off when the input is deactivated. (Output 2
is the TIME DELAY CONTACT.) When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will
Reset to Zero and the outputs, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as an INSTANTANEOUS AND TIME DELAY CONTACT timer,
set preset 1 value to zero and set preset 2 value to the desired delay value.
When “RUN” is at a low level, time will increment and output 1 will be
activated. Output 2 (TIME DELAY CONTACT) will activate when preset 2
is reached. To recycle use 1) reset, or 2) set the power-up reset switch to
enable, then remove and reapply input power.
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, output 1 will turn
on when preset 1 is reached and output 2 will turn on when preset
2 is reached. The outputs will turn off after their respective
programmed time values have occurred. Also at the end of timed output 2, the
unit will automatically Reset to Zero and start the cycle over. Manual resetP
will turn off both outputs, if turned on, and reset the time to zero.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is equal
to the sum of the preset 2 value and the programmed timed output 2 value. The
first lobe of the cycle will use output 1. The first ON delay value is equal to
the programmed timed output 1 value.== The second lobe of the cycle will
use output 2. The second ON delay is equal to the programmed timed output
2 value.== When “RUN” is at a low level, time will increment. Output 1 (first
ON delay) will activate when preset 1 is reached, and output 2 (second ON
delay) will activate when preset 2 is reached. The unit will recycle at the end
of timed output 2.
MODE 1 LATCH OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO, TIME
CONTINUES AT PRESET 2 (INSTANTANEOUS & TIME DELAY
CONTACT, TIME UP)
MODE 6 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO AT
PRESET 2 = (TWO LOBE OFF/ON RECYCLING, TIME UP)
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, output 1 will latch
on when preset 1 is reached, and output 2 will latch on when preset
2 is reached. Time will continue to accumulate after preset 2 is
reached. This mode also has a input tracking feature (INSTANTANEOUS
CONTACT) where if preset 1 is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the
input is activated, and it will turn off when the input is deactivated. (Output 2
is the TIME DELAY CONTACT.) When manual resetP occurs, the unit will
Reset to Zero, and the outputs, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as an INSTANTANEOUS AND TIME DELAY CONTACT timer,
follow the description under Mode 0.
MODE 2
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, output 1 will turn
on when preset 1 is reached and output 2 will turn on when preset
2 is reached. The outputs will turn off after their respective
programmed time values have occurred. Also when preset 2 is reached, the
unit will automatically reset the time to zero and start the cycle over. (Output
2 will remain on until its time value has occurred.) Manual resetP will turn
off both outputs, if still turned on, and reset the time to zero.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is equal
to the preset 2 value. The first lobe of the cycle will use output 1. The first ON
delay is equal to the programmed timed output 1 value.== The second lobe of
the cycle will use output 2. The second ON delay is equal to the programmed
timed output 2 value.== When “RUN” is at a low level, time will increment.
Output 1 (first ON delay) will activate when preset 1 is reached, and output 2
(second ON delay) will activate when preset 2 is reached. The unit will
recycle at the beginning of timed output 2.
OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, LATCH OUTPUT 2 AT
PRESET 2, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO, TIME STOPS AT PRESET
2 (INTERVAL, TIME UP)
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, output 1 will turn
on when preset 1 is reached. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
will turn on and output 1 will turn off. Output 2 will remain
latched on until a manual reset occurs, and the unit will stop timing when
preset 2 is reached. This mode also has an input tracking feature where if
preset 1 is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the input is activated, and it
will turn off when the input is deactivated. (After preset 2 is reached, output
1 will turn off and stay off, regardless of the input condition, until a manual
resetP occurs.) When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will Reset to Zero and
the outputs, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as an INTERVAL timer, set preset 1 value to zero and set preset 2
value to the desired delay value. When “RUN” is at a low level, time will
increment and output 1 will be activated. Output 1 will deactivate (regardless
of the input condition) when preset 2 (TIME DELAY VALUE) is reached. To
recycle use 1) reset, or 2) set the power-up reset switch to enable, then remove
and reapply input power.
MODE 3
MODE 7 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, TIMED OUTPUT 2 AT PRESET
2, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO AFTER TIMED OUTPUT 2 =
(INSTANTANEOUS & TWO LOBE OFF/ON RECYCLING, TIME UP)
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, output 1 will turn
on when preset 1 is reached. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
will turn on and output 1 will turn off. Output 2 will turn off after
its programmed time value has occurred. At the end of timed output 2, the unit
will automatically Reset to Zero and start the cycle over. This mode also has
an input tracking feature (INSTANTANEOUS CONTACT) where if preset 1
is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the input is activated, and off when
the input is deactivated. (After preset 2 is reached, output 1 will turn off and
stay off, regardless of the input condition until a reset occurs.) Manual resetP
will turn off both outputs, if turned on, and reset the time to zero.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is equal
to the sum of the preset 2 value and the programmed timed output 2 value.
The first lobe of the cycle will use output 1. The first ON delay is equal to the
difference between preset 1 and preset 2 values (this is because output 1 will
turn off at preset 2). The second lobe of the cycle will use output 2. The
second ON delay is equal to the programmed timed output 2 value.== When
“RUN” is at a low level, time will increment. Output 1 (first ON delay) will
activate when preset 1 is reached, and output 2 (second ON delay) will
activate when preset 2 is reached (output 1 will deactivate when preset 2 is
reached). The unit will recycle at the end of timed output 2.
OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, LATCH OUTPUT 2 AT
PRESET 2, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO, TIME CONTINUES AT
PRESET 2 (INTERVAL, TIME UP)
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, output 1 will turn
on when preset 1 is reached. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
will turn on and output 1 will turn off. Output 2 will remain
latched on until a manual reset occurs, and the unit will continue to
accumulate time after preset 2 is reached. This mode also has an input tracking
feature where if preset 1 is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the input is
activated, and it will turn off when the input is deactivated. (After preset 2 is
reached, output 1 will turn off and stay off, regardless of the input condition,
until a manual reset occurs.) When manual resetP occurs, the unit will Reset
to Zero, and the outputs, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as an INTERVAL timer, follow the description under Mode 2
P - Manual reset, either by front panel reset (if enabled) or remote reset, is
always active, and will override any condition or state of the timer.
= - The timed output value must be less than the value required to time from
the reset condition to the preset point. Otherwise, the output will appear to
be latched on.
== - The maximum ON delay is 99.99 seconds.
MODE 4 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO, TIME
STOPS AT PRESET 2
In this mode, as the unit times up from zero, output 1 will turn
on when preset 1 is reached, and output 2 will turn on when preset
2 is reached. The outputs will turn off after their respective
programmed time values have occurred. Also, the unit will stop timing when
preset 2 is reached. When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will Reset to Zero.
Manual resetP will terminate the timed output, if the outputs are still turned
on.
(Modes Cont’d)
301
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LIBRA TIMER (Cont’d)
MODE 8 LATCH OUTPUT AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO
PRESET 2, TIME STOPS AT ZERO (INSTANTANEOUS & TIME
DELAY CONTACT, TIME DOWN)
MODE 13 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET
TO PRESET 2 AFTER TIMED OUTPUT 2 = (TWO LOBE OFF/ON
RECYCLING, TIME DOWN)
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset 2, output 1 will
latch on when preset 1 is reached and output 2 will latch on when
zero is reached. The unit will stop timing when zero is reached.
This mode also has an input tracking feature (INSTANTANEOUS
CONTACT) where if preset 1 is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the
input is activated, and it will turn off when the input is deactivated. (Output 2
is the TIME DELAY CONTACT.) When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will
Reset to Preset and the outputs, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as an INSTANTANEOUS AND TIME DELAY CONTACT timer,
set preset 1 value to zero and set preset 2 value to the desired delay value.
When “RUN” is at a low level, time will decrement and output 1 will be
activated. Output 2 (TIME DELAY CONTACT) will activate when zero is
reached. To recycle use 1) reset, or 2) set the power-up reset switch to enable,
then remove and reapply input power.
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset 2, output 1 will
turn on when preset 1 is reached and output 2 will turn on when
zero is reached. The outputs will turn off after their respective
programmed time values have occurred. Also, at the end of timed output 2, the
unit will automatically Reset to Preset 2 and start the cycle over. Manual
resetP will turn off both outputs, if turned on, and reset the time to preset 2.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is equal
to the sum of the preset 2 value and the programmed timed output 2 value. The
first lobe of the cycle will use output 1. The first ON delay is equal to the
programmed timed output 1 value.== The second lobe of the cycle will use
output 2. The second ON delay is equal to the programmed timed output 2
value.== When “RUN” is at a low level, time will decrement. Output 1 (first
ON delay) will activate when preset 1 is reached, and output 2 (second ON
delay) will activate when zero is reached. The unit will recycle at the end of
timed output 2.
MODE 9 LATCH OUTPUT AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO
PRESET 2, TIME CONTINUES AT ZERO (INSTANTANEOUS &
TIME DELAY CONTACT, TIME DOWN)
MODE 14 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET
TO PRESET 2 AT ZERO = (TWO LOBE OFF/ON RECYCLING,
TIME DOWN)
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset 2, output 1 will
latch on when preset 1 is reached, and output 2 will latch on when
zero is reached. Time will continue to accumulate after zero is
reached. This mode also has an input tracking feature (INSTANTANEOUS
CONTACT) which if preset 1 is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the
input is activated, and it will turn off when the input is deactivated. (Output 2
is the TIME DELAY CONTACT.) When manual resetP occurs, the unit will
Reset to Preset 2 and the outputs, if latched on, will unlatch.
To use as an INSTANTANEOUS AND TIME DELAY CONTACT timer,
follow the description under Mode 8.
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset 2, output 1 will
turn on when preset 1 is reached and output 2 will turn on when
zero is reached. The outputs will turn off after their respective
programmed time values have occurred. Also when zero is reached, the unit
will automatically reset the time to preset 2 and start the cycle over. (Output
2 will remain on until its time value has occurred.) Manual resetP will turn
off both outputs, if still turned on, and reset the time to Preset 2.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is equal
to the preset 2 value. The first lobe of the cycle will use output 1. The first ON
delay is equal to the programmed timed output 1 value.== The second lobe of
the cycle will use output 2. The second ON delay is equal to the programmed
timed output 2 value.== When “RUN” is at a low level, time will decrement.
Output 1 (first ON delay) will activate when preset 1 is reached, and output 2
(second ON delay) will activate when zero is reached. The unit will recycle at
the beginning of timed output 2.
MODE 10 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, LATCH OUTPUT 2 AT ZERO,
MANUAL RESET TO PRESET 2, TIME STOPS AT PRESET 2
(INTERVAL, TIME DOWN)
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset 2, output 1 will
turn on when preset 1 is reached. When zero is reached, output 2
will turn on and output 1 will turn off. Output 2 will remain
latched on until a manual reset occurs, and the unit will stop timing when zero
is reached. This mode also has an input tracking feature where if preset 1 is
set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the input is activated, and it will turn
off when the input is deactivated. (After zero is reached output 1 will turn off
and stay off, regardless of the input condition, until a manual resetP occurs.)
When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will Reset to Preset 2 and the outputs,
if latched on, will unlatch.
MODE 15 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, TIMED OUTPUT 2 AT ZERO,
AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET 2 AFTER TIMED OUTPUT 2 =
(INSTANTANEOUS & TWO LOBE OFF/ON RECYCLING, TIME
DOWN)
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset 2, output 1 will
turn on when preset 1 is reached. When zero is reached output 2
will turn on and output 1 will turn off. Output 2 will turn off after
its programmed time value has occurred. At the end of Timed output 2, the
unit will automatically Reset to Preset 2 and start the cycle over. This mode
also has an input tracking feature (INSTANTANEOUS CONTACT) where if
preset 1 is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the input is activated, and
off when the input is deactivated. (After zero is reached, Output 1 will turn off
and stay off, regardless of the input condition, until a reset occurs.) Manual
resetP will turn off both outputs, if turned on, and reset the time to preset 2.
When used as an OFF/ON RECYCLING timer, the total cycle time is equal
to the sum of the preset 2 value and the programmed timed output 2 value. The
first lobe of the cycle will use output 1. The first ON delay value is equal to
the difference between preset 1 and zero (this is because output 1 will turn off
at zero). The second lobe of the cycle will use output 2. The second ON delay
value is equal to the programmed timed output 2 value.== When “RUN” is at
a low level, time will decrement. Output 1 (first ON delay) will activate when
preset 1 is reached, and output 2 (second ON delay) will activate when zero is
reached (output 1 will deactivate when zero is reached). The unit will recycle
at the end of timed output 2.
MODE 11 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, LATCH OUTPUT 2 AT ZERO,
MANUAL RESET TO PRESET 2, TIME CONTINUES AT PRESET 2
(INTERVAL, TIME DOWN)
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset 2, output 1 will
turn on when preset 1 is reached. When zero is reached, output 2
will turn on and output 1 will turn off. Output 2 will remain
latched on until a manual reset occurs, and the unit will continue to
accumulate time after zero is reached. This mode also has a input tracking
feature where if preset 1 is set to zero, output 1 will turn on when the input is
activated, and it will turn off when the input is deactivated. (After zero is
reached, output 1 will turn off and stay off, regardless of the input condition,
until a manual resetP occurs.) When manual resetP occurs, the unit will
Reset to Preset 2, and the outputs, if latched on, will unlatch.
MODE 12 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO
PRESET 2, TIME STOPS AT ZERO
In this mode, as the unit times down from preset 2, output 1 will
turn on when preset 1 is reached, and output 2 will turn on when
zero is reached. The outputs will turn off after their respective
programmed time values have occurred. Also, the unit will stop timing when
zero is reached. When a manual resetP occurs, the unit will Reset to Preset 2.
Manual resetP will terminate the timed outputs, if the outputs are still turned
on.
= - The timed output value must be less than the value required to time from
the reset condition to the preset point. Otherwise, the output will appear to
be latched on.
== - The maximum ON delay is 99.99 seconds.
Note: Many other modes of operation, too numerous to mention here, are
possible with the Libra Timer. These “extra” modes of operation are
accomplished by tying inputs to outputs, by using power up reset functions,
etc.
P - Manual reset, either by front panel reset (if enabled) or remote reset, is
always active, and will override any present condition or state of the timer.
302
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VB3
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubbers:
RLC #SNUB0000
TIME RANGE VALUE
Time Range switch settings are shown to the right of the chart below. The
time range number corresponds to a binary code represented by the DIP switch
positions. When the switch is up, it is equivalent to a zero. When the switch is
down, it is equivalent to a one. The time range switch settings can be easily
observed from the front panel by using self-test. At the end of self-test (the third
set of switches shown), the state of these time range switches are displayed.
These time range values must not be changed during normal course of operation
because of the possibility of erratic operation. A reset must be made after the
desired range has been selected to lock it into the internal memory.
TIME RANGE ZERO
99.99 Seconds
TIME RANGE ONE
99.99 Minutes
TIME RANGE TWO
99.99 Hours
TIME RANGE FOUR
999.9 Seconds
TIME RANGE FIVE
999.9 Minutes
TIME RANGE SIX
999.9 Hours
TIME RANGE EIGHT
9999 Seconds
TIME RANGE NINE
9999 Minutes
TIME RANGE TEN
9999 Hours
TIME RANGE TWELVE
99 Minutes and 59 Seconds
TIME RANGE THIRTEEN
99 Hours and 59 Minutes
Note: TIME RANGES 3, 7, and 11 are not valid ranges.
CONNECTIONS
As depicted in the drawing showing
the rear view of the Libra Timer, there
are two terminal blocks where all wiring connections are made. The blocks
can be removed for easy access to the
terminal screws. To remove the block,
pull from the back of the block until it
slides clear of the terminal block
shroud. CAUTION: The terminal
blocks should NOT be removed with
power applied to the unit.
All the DC power and input
connections are made to the top
terminal block labeled TBA. The AC
power and output connections are
made to the bottom terminal block
labeled TBB. The input connections
will be discussed first, using the
drawing as a guide.
(The input connections are the same for 1 or 2 preset timers.)
DC POWER AND INPUT CONNECTIONS
Terminal number 5 on TBA (the first terminal from the left), is the +12 VDC
input/output terminal. As an output, this terminal is for sensor supply and can
provide up to 150 mA of current. As an input, an external 11 to 14 VDC supply
can be appplied to this terminal to power the unit in the absence of AC power.
Terminal 4 is the common terminal which the common line from the sensor and
other inputs are connected. (Do NOT connect relay common or solid-state
output common to this point.) Terminal 3 is the run terminal. When the signal at
this terminal is pulled low (zero volts), time will accumulate on the display.
Terminal 2 is the Program Disable (PGM. DIS.) terminal. When this terminal is
at high level (+5 V), the Preset value (s) and timed output value(s) can be
changed using the front panel buttons. (Outputs can also be tested during selftest. See “Self-Test” section for further details.) When terminal 2 is at a low
level (connected to COMMON), changing these values and testing of the
outputs is no longer possible. Terminal 1 is the Remote Reset terminal. When
this terminal is at a low level (connected to COMMON), the unit will reset and,
the outputs will turn off (if activated). As long as reset is low, the unit is held at
reset.
Do not power up the unit with the Remote Reset terminal tied low and the
Power Up Reset DIP switch enabled. This causes the display to lock. To restore
the display, move the DIP switch to the disable position and cycle power.
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. It should be noted that the methods listed below may not
be necessary for every unit installation. In extremely high EMI environments,
additional measures may be needed. The unit becomes more immune to EMI
with fewer I/O connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are
very important and can mean the difference between a successful installation or
a troublesome installation. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for
successful installation in an industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
AC POWER & OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
As mentioned before, AC power and output connections are made to the
bottom terminal block, labeled TBB. Primary A.C. power is connected to
terminal 1 and 2 (marked A.C. Power, located on the left-hand side of terminal
block TBB). For best results, the A.C. Power should be relatively “clean” and
within the specified ±10% variation limits. Drawing power from heavily loaded
circuits or from circuits that also power loads that cycle on and off, should be
avoided.
Terminals 3, 4, and 5 are used to connect to the output relay 1. Terminal 3 is
the normally closed contact. Terminal 4 is the normally open contact, and
Terminal 5 is the output relay common. Terminal 6 is an output common used
for the solid-state output(s). This terminal should NOT be used as the common
for the input or control terminals. Terminal 7 is the current sinking output 1
(labeled 01-SNK.). This internally connects to an NPN Open Collector
transistor. The remaining terminals are for the dual preset version of the Libra
timer and serve the same functions as those for the single preset unit. Terminal
8 is current sinking output 2 (labeled 02-SNK.). Terminal 9 is the normally
closed contact of relay 2. Terminal 10 is the normally open contact. Terminal 11
is the output relay common.
303
FRONT PANEL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
SELF-TEST
These units employ six front panel buttons for control and data entering. The
button functions are described below.
RESET “R” - This button resets the counter to either zero or preset, depending
on the mode of operation selected. For this button to operate, the
enable/disable reset button switch, at the rear of the unit, must be set to the
enable (EN) position. This button is also used in conjunction with the two
preset buttons (one button on the single preset unit) to view and change the
timed output value. (When reset is activated, all processes are stopped or
interrupted. I.E. outputs turn off, time stops, display is halted, etc.) This is
the case under any mode of operation, or any data entry mode.
PRESET “P1” (“P2”) - The preset buttons are labeled and are the two lefthand buttons of the top row, located on the front of the unit. (For the single
preset unit, the left-most button is the preset button.) When the “P1” button
is pressed, preset 1 is displayed. When the “P2” (if available) button is
pressed, preset 2 is displayed. These values will remain displayed for
approximately 10 sec. after release of the button. Also, the preset buttons are
used in conjunction with the reset button, to view and change the timed
output values. (See “To Enter A New Timed Output Value” section.)
ENTER “E” - This button is used in the “Preset Enter” mode and in the
“Timed Output Enter” mode. After the desired value is obtained on the
display, this button is pressed which then enters the value into the internal
processor. This new value, at that instant, is used in the processing of preset
or timed output values. “E” is also used at the end of self-test to exit self-test.
This unit has a built-in, self-test feature, which can be activated without
losing time, preset values, missing preset points, timed output durations, or
interfering with control functions. With this test, all digits are cycled through,
then the mode select, the power up reset, and the time range switch settings are
displayed (in that order). During the display of the mode select switch settings,
the outputs can also be tested.
To enter self-test, press the two upper right-hand digit buttons (located on the
front panel), simultaneously. At this time, whatever time value was displayed
will disappear and be replaced by a string of four zeros. This will be shown for
about half a second, then a string of ones will appear for the same time duration.
Following these, a string of twos and so on, up to nine will be displayed. After
the nines are shown, three decimal points will appear. After this portion, an
interlace pattern of the same numbers will be shown. First, a combination of 1,
0, 1, 0 then 1, 2, 1, 2 and so on, until all digits from zero to nine have been
displayed.
The next portion of self-test will display a group of ones and zeros. These
ones and zeros are the settings of the mode select switches (the four left-hand
DIP switches only). This pattern directly corresponds to the number
representing the mode of operation. If the switches are changed while at this
point in the self-test, the settings can be seen to change. These changes will not
affect counter operation immediately, but any changes will take effect when
self-test is exited. When the switch is “DOWN”, the display will show a one.
When the switch is “UP”, the display will show a zero. If no testing of the
outputs is required, press the “E” button until the unit advances to the next
display (the unit will next show the power-up reset DIP switch setting). Also,
if no activity occurs on the switches or the front panel buttons within 18 sec.
after the unit pauses at the mode switch display, the unit will automatically
advance to the next display.
During the time the mode switch settings are displayed, the outputs can be
tested. To activate the outputs, press the “P1” button (for dual preset version,
“P1” or “P2” is pressed).
TO ENTER A NEW PRESET VALUE
FIRST: Press “P1” (or “P2”, if a two preset unit). This will display the
respective preset value and it will remain displayed for approximately 10 sec.
after release of the last button pushed. (At this time, preset display mode can
be exited without change, by pressing the “E” button.)
SECOND: Once the preset value is displayed, changing the digit value can be
done by pressing the button directly beneath the digit position to be changed.
(This value cannot be changed when “PGM. DIS.” is activated.) Each time
the button is pressed, the digit will increment by one. Also, pressing and
holding the button will continuously scroll the digit from 0 through 9, then
back to 0 again. When the desired value for that digit is reached, release the
button. Do this for all the digits to be changed.
THIRD: Press the “E” (Enter) button to enter the value into the unit’s memory.
As soon as the “E” button is pressed, this new value is used as the operating
data. This means, if the preset value is entered, and the old or new value has
not been reached, the new value will be used without process disruption
(Preset on the fly). If the “E” button is not pressed within 10 sec. after the
last digit has been changed, the value will disappear (go back to normal
display mode) and the unit will continue to operate on the previous value.
During the displaying, changing, and entering of a new preset value, all
functions of the unit are operational, such as, timing, resetting, outputs firing,
etc. Note: For RTP modes of operation, “P1” (“P2” for dual preset units)
will determine the “Start Count” value of each cycle.
Note: The “PGM. DIS.” terminal must be at a high level for the outputs to be
activated. Also, caution should be used when testing the outputs, so as not to
cause any undesirable or hazardous conditions in the system. (To turn off the
outputs, release the button.) If the outputs are not tested, the state of the
outputs will remain the same as it was prior to self-test. If the outputs are
tested in self-test, the outputs will be turned off after exiting self-test.
After the display of the mode switch settings, the state of the power-up reset
DIP switch is shown. If the display shows a zero, then power-up reset is
“DISABLED”. If the display shows a one, then power-up reset is “ENABLED”
which means the unit will reset itself when input power is restored. As with the
previous DIP switch settings, the unit will go on to the next display if no activity
occurs on the switches or the front panel buttons within 18 seconds after
entering the power-up reset display section. (Pressing “E” will also cause the
unit to advance to the next display.)
The time range DIP switch settings are displayed next. This pattern directly
corresponds to the number representing the time range value. If the switches are
changed while at this point in self-test, the settings can be seen to change. These
changes will not affect timer operation immediately, but any changes will take
affect when self-test is exited. When the switch is “DOWN”, the display will
show a one. When the switch is “UP”, the display will show a zero. Press the
“E” button until the unit exits self-test (The unit will go back to displaying the
time). Also, if no activity occurs on the switches or the front panel buttons
within 18 seconds after the unit pauses at the time range switch display, the unit
will automatically exit self-test.
Rapid advance of the self-test routine can be done by pressing and releasing
any of the front panel buttons except for the “R” button. (Pressing “R” at any
time, except when entering the timed output mode, will reset the unit.)
TO ENTER A NEW TIMED OUTPUT VALUE
FIRST: Press and hold the “P1” (or “P2”, for two preset units) button and then
press the “R” (Reset) button. At this time, the respective timed output value
will be displayed and will remain displayed for approximately 10sec. after
release of the last button pushed. (At this time, the timed output display mode
can be exited without change, by pressing the “E” button.)
SECOND: Once the timed output is displayed, changing the digit value can be
done by pressing the button directly beneath the digit position to be changed.
(This value cannot be changed when “PGM. DIS.” is activated.) Each time
the button is pressed, the digit will increment by one. Also, pressing and
holding the button will continuously scroll the digit from 0 through 9, then
back to 0 again. When the desired value for that digit is reached, release the
button. Do this for all the digits to be changed. (This value can be set
between .01sec and 99.99 sec.)
THIRD: Press the “E” (Enter) button to enter the value into the unit’s memory.
As soon as the “E” button is pressed, this new value is used as the operating
data. If the “E” button is not pressed within 10 sec. after the last digit has
been changed, the value will disappear (go back to normal display mode) and
the unit will continue to operate on the previous value. During the
displaying, changing, and entering of a new timed output value, all functions
of the unit are active, such as timing, resetting, output firing, etc. without any
interruption.
INITIAL POWER-UP & FACTORY SETTINGS
When the unit is shipped from
are set as shown.
Preset 1
Preset 2
Time value
Timed output values
the factory, the values and following modes
=
=
=
=
05.00
10.00 (if a dual preset version)
0.00
00.10 second
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
All switches are moved up to the “UP” position except for the front panel
reset enable switch, which is moved “DOWN”. With the switches set in these
positions, the unit is operating in mode zero (latch preset(s), manual reset to
zero, time stops at preset 2). The time range value is 99.99 seconds and the
power-up reset is disabled.
304
INSTALLATION
The Libra counters and timers are designed to be panel-mounted with a
gasket to provide a water-tight seal. Two mounting clips and screws are
provided for easy installation. Consideration should be given to the thickness
of the panel. Too thin of a panel may distort and not provide a water-tight seal.
(Recommended minimum panel thickness is 1/8”.)
After the panel cut-out has been completed and deburred, carefully apply
the gasket to the panel. DO NOT APPLY THE ADHESIVE SIDE OF THE
GASKET TO THE COUNTER BEZEL. Insert the unit into the panel. As
depicted in the drawing (at right), install the screws into the narrow end of the
mounting clips. Thread the screws into the clips until the pointed end just
protrudes through the other side. Install each of the two mounting clips by
inserting the wide lip of the
clips into the front end of the
hole, located on either side of
the case. Then snap the clip
onto the case. Tighten the
screws evenly to apply uniform
compression, thus providing a
water-tight seal. Caution: Only
minimum pressure is required
to seal panel. Do NOT overtighten mounting screws.
APPLICATION FOR DUAL LEVEL PRESET LIBRA TIMER
CURING/DRYING PROCESS CONTROL
In a typical manufacturing curing/drying process, it is required to control
the duration of time heat is applied to the items within an oven. These items
are to be heated at a high temperature for a long period of time (30 minutes).
At the end of the curing/drying process, the heat is turned off and an indicator
light is turned on, signaling the unloading attendant. The dual preset Libra
timer will satisfy all these requirements.
The Libra timer is first set to minutes time range, which is time range 9.
Next, the mode switches are set to Mode 0 (Latch Outputs at Presets, Manual
Reset to Zero, Time Stops at Preset 2). Mode 0 is used because the outputs
must latch on when the presets are reached (When the outputs latch on, the
heaters de-energize). Also, the time increments will stop at preset 2. The
power-up reset switch is set to “Enable”, which causes the unit to start the
cycle over in the event of an input power loss (when enabled, the unit will
reset itself when input power is restored). The front panel reset button
“EN./DIS.” switch is “Disabled” to prevent accidental resetting (restarting) of
the cycle. The “REM. RST.” terminal is connected to a remote reset button
located at the loading end of the oven. The “PGM. DIS.” and the “RUN”
terminals are tied to the “COMMON” terminal. With “PGM. DIS.” tied low
(this is done after preset 1 is set to 3 minutes and preset 2 is set to 33 minutes),
the heating time periods cannot be changed. “RUN” is permanently tied low,
which causes the unit to increment time (when Preset 2 is reached, Mode 0
will cause time accumulation to stop). The normally closed contact of Relay
1 is connected to the high temperature heater and the normally closed contact
of Relay 2 is connected to the low temperature heater. The operation sequence
is as follows:
The operator/attendant wheels a rack of items into the heating area (oven).
Once the oven doors are closed, the operator/attendant presses the remote
reset switch which starts the heating cycle (both high and low temperature
heaters are turned on at this time). After three minutes have elapsed, output 1
fires, which opens the normally closed contact of Relay 1. (This turns off the
high temperature heater.) After 30 minutes have elapsed, output 2 fires, which
stops the time accumulation and opens the normally closed contact of Relay
2. (This turns off the low temperature heater.) Also, the normally open contact
of Relay 2 closes, which then turns on the indicator light. (This signals the
unloading attendant that the process is complete.)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
PART NUMBERS FOR
AVAILABLE SUPPLY VOLTAGES
230VAC
115VAC
DESCRIPTION
LIBT1
Single Preset LCD Libra Timer
LIBT1010
LIBT1000
LIBT2
Dual Preset LCD Libra Timer
LIBT2010
LIBT2000
LIBT1E
Single Preset LED Libra Timer
LIBT1E10
LIBT1E00
LIBT2E
Dual Preset LED Libra Timer
LIBT2E10
LIBT2E00
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC
distributor.
305
Bulletin No. LNXNT-B
Drawing No. LP0308
Released 9/02
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion-controls.com
MODEL LNXNT - SHORT CASE DUAL PRESET TIMER
!
AVAILABLE IN 5 VDC AND 10 to 30 VDC VERSIONS
!
0.3" (7.6 mm) HIGH, 6 DIGIT DISPLAY
!
BI-DIRECTIONAL TIMING
!
DISPLAY SCROLLING (SELECTABLE)
!
SOLID-STATE CURRENT SINKING OUTPUTS
!
PROGRAMMABLE TIMED OUTPUTS
!
REMOTE RESET CAPABILITY
!
SIMPLIFIED FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMING
!
ABILITY TO LOCK OUT FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS
!
ON-LINE SELF-TEST
!
SEALED FRONT PANEL CONSTRUCTION (NEMA 4X/IP65)
!
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (E2PROM)
!
4 TIME RANGES
0.01 SECONDS
0.01 MINUTES
0.001 SECONDS
0.001 MINUTES
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
The LNXNT presettable Timer is an economical and reliable solution to dual
preset level timing requirements. This unit features current sinking input
configurations, programmable timed outputs, non-volatile memory, and many
other features that satisfy most dual preset timing applications.
The LNXNT Timer has two main timing actions, Reset to Zero (RTZ) and
Reset to Preset (RTP). There are sixteen modes of operation.
All parameters are programmed through the front panel buttons. The LNXNT
Timer has an internal non-volatile memory device which eliminates the need for
battery back-up. When power is removed or interrupted, this device maintains all
data set-ups necessary for system operation. A Program Disable terminal is
provided, which prevents accidental changes or tampering by unauthorized
personnel to the presets or timed output values. The front panel reset button can
be enabled or disabled by a rear panel DIP switch. This timer has an on-line selftest, which can be run at any time without losing time or missing a preset value.
Power, input, and output connections are made via fixed terminal blocks at
the rear of the unit. DIP switches at the rear of the unit are used to set the input
configuration and the desired mode of operation.
The LNXNT Timer has a sealed high impact plastic bezel and meets NEMA
4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dust, when properly installed.
1. DISPLAY: 6-digit, 0.3" (7.6 mm) high LCD display.
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS: 25 mA @ 5 VDC (±5%) or
25 mA @ 10 to 30 VDC.
Power supplies must be Class 2 or SELV rated.
3. RUN INPUT: Accepts switch contact closures and NPN Open Collector
outputs and similar types of current sinking sensors.
VIL = 0.5 V max., internally pulled up to 5 VDC through a 10 KΩ resistor
(ISNK = 0.5 mA). Response time = 1 msec. (This unit operates with VCM E
through H modules)
4. TIME ACCURACY: ±0.01%
5. TIME RANGES:
Time
0.01 sec
0.001 sec
0.01 min
0.001 min
6. CONTROL INPUTS: Activate low (VIL = 0.5 V max.), internally pulled up
to 5 VDC through a 10 KΩ resistor (ISNK = 0.5 mA).
Remote Reset: Response time = 10 msec. A low resets the unit and
deactivates outputs.
Program Disable: A low inhibits the changing of presets and timed outputs,
as well as testing outputs in self-test.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Max. Display
9999.99
999.999
9999.99
999.999
CAUTION:
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 2.7" (68.6)H x 4.0" (101.6)W.
1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
Electromagnetic RF fields
7. OUTPUTS:
Solid-State: Current sinking NPN open collector transistors.
ISNK = 100 mA max., VOH = 30 VDC max., VOL = 1 V @ 100 mA.
Programmable Timed Output: The timed output can be programmed from
0.01 sec. to 99.99 sec., ±0.1% + 10 msec. max. The timed output is set for
0.10 second at the factory.
8. MEMORY RETENTION:
Non-volatile E2PROM retains all programmed information when power is
removed or interrupted.
Power Cycles(ON/OFF): 100,000 min.
Data Retention: 10 years min.
9. INPUT, POWER, AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS:
Fixed terminal block.
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C
to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Fast transients (burst)
RF conducted interference
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power 1
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 1
150 KHz - 80 MHz
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Power lines had an external EMI filter, (RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent)
installed.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
12. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
Front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use, when
properly installed. (Panel gasket, mounting clip, nut fasteners, and screws
included with unit.) Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
13. WEIGHT: 0.2 lbs (91 g).
SWITCH SET-UP
S1 - DIS.RST.: Disables front panel reset.
EN. RST.: Enables front panel reset.
S2 to S5: These are the mode select DIP switches.
See Modes of Operation for the switch settings of a specific mode.
S6 - 0.00: Sets the timer to display two decimal places.
0.000: Sets the timer to display three decimal places.
S7 - Sec.: Sets the timer to display in seconds.
Min.: Sets the timer to display in minutes.
MODES OF OPERATION, DIP SWITCH SET-UP
The DIP switches for the various operating modes are accessible from the rear of the unit.
Notes
1. A manual reset, either from the front panel reset (if enabled) or remote reset overrides any condition or state of the timer and
begins the cycle again.
2. In modes four, five, twelve, and thirteen, the output may appear to be latched if the time delay is longer than the time required
for the timer to reach the preset point or zero.
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LNXNT TIMER
MODE 0 LATCHED OUTPUTS AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO
ZERO
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on and time continues to accumulate.
When preset 2 is reached, output 2 turns on and time
continues to accumulate. When a manual reset is performed, the time
resets to zero, the outputs turn off, and the cycle starts again.
2
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LNXNT TIMER (Cont’d)
MODE 1 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
turns on. Time continues to accumulate after the
preset levels have been reached. The outputs turn off after their
respective programmed time values. When a manual reset is
performed, the time resets to zero and the cycle starts again.
MODE 2 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, LATCH OUTPUT 2
AT PRESET 2, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 1
turns off, and output 2 turns on. Time continues to
accumulate after the preset levels have been reached.
Output 2 remains on until a manual reset occurs. Manual reset turns
off both outputs, the time resets to zero, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 3 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, TIMED OUTPUT 2
AT PRESET 2, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 1
turns off and output 2 turns on for the amount of time
programmed. Time continues to accumulate after the preset levels
have been reached. When a manual reset is performed, the time resets
to zero, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 4 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, TIMED OUTPUT 2
AT PRESET 2, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO AT PRESET
2
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
turns on for the amount of time programmed. At the
beginning of timed output 2, output 1 turns off, the time automatically
resets to zero, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 5 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, AUTOMATIC RESET TO
ZERO AT PRESET 2
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
turns on. The outputs turn off at the end of their
respective programmed time values. At preset 2, the time
automatically resets to zero and starts the cycle again.
3
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LNXNT TIMER (Cont’d)
MODE 6 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, TIMED OUTPUT 2
AT PRESET 2, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO AFTER
TIMED OUTPUT 2
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 1
turns off and output 2 turns on for the amount of time
programmed. At the end of timed output 2, the time automatically
resets to zero and starts the cycle again.
MODE 7 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, AUTOMATIC RESET TO
ZERO AFTER TIMED OUTPUT 2
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
turns on. The outputs turn off at the end of their
respective programmed time values. At the end of timed output 2, the
time automatically resets to zero, and starts the cycle again.
MODE 8 LATCH OUTPUT AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, MANUAL
RESET TO PRESET 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on, when zero is reached, output
2 turns on. Time continues to decrement after the preset
levels have been reached. When a manual reset is performed, the time
resets to preset 2, the outputs turn off, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 9 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, MANUAL
RESET TO PRESET 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
2 turns on. The outputs turn off when their respective
programmed time values end. Time continues to decrement after the
preset levels have been reached. When a manual reset is performed,
the time resets to preset 2, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 10 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, LATCH OUTPUT 2 AT
ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
2 turns on and output 1 turns off. Output 2 remains on
until a manual reset is performed. Time continues to decrement after
preset levels are reached. Manual reset turns off both outputs, if
activated, the time resets to preset 2, and the cycle starts again.
4
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LNXNT TIMER (Cont’d)
MODE 11 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, TIMED OUTPUT 2 AT
ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1
is reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached,
output 1 turns off and output 2 turns on for the
amount of time programmed. Time continues to decrement after the
preset levels have been reached. When a manual reset is performed,
the time resets to preset 2, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 12 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, TIMED OUTPUT 2 AT
ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET 2 AT ZERO
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1
is reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached,
output 2 turns on for the amount of time
programmed, output 1 turns off, and the time
automatically resets to preset 2.
MODE 13 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO,
AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET 2 AT ZERO
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1
is reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached,
output 2 turns on. The outputs turn off at the end of
their respective programmed time values. At zero, the time
automatically resets to preset 2 and the cycle starts again.
MODE 14 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, TIMED OUTPUT 2 AT
ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET 2 AFTER TIMED
OUTPUT 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1
is reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached,
output 1 turns off and output 2 turns on for the
amount of time programmed. At the end of timed output 2, the time
automatically resets to preset 2, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 15 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO,
AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET 2 AFTER TIMED
OUTPUT 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1
is reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached,
output 2 turns on. The outputs turn off at the end of
their respective programmed time values. At the end of timed output
2, the time automatically resets to preset 2 and the cycle starts again.
5
POWER-UP DIAGNOSTICS
Upon applying power, the LNXNT Timer performs an internal selfdiagnostic test of all the stored data. If the tests do not agree, a “P” appears on
the right side of the display. Normal operation of the unit will continue while
the “P” is displayed. Press the “E” button to remove the “P” and check all data
set-up values to be certain they are correct.
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful installation or a troublesome
installation. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation
in an industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VB3
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubbers:
RLC #SNUB0000
Terminal 2 - “COMM.” (common) Is the common line to which the sensor and
other input commons are connected.
Terminal 3 - “RUN” When this terminal is connected to common, time will be
registered.
Terminal 6 - “PGM.DIS.” (program disable) When this terminal is left open
(unconnected), the following values can be programmed using the front panel
buttons:
Timed Output Values
Preset Values
Outputs can also be tested during self-test under this condition (See Self-Test
description for further details). When terminal is low (0.5 VMAX), changing
these values and testing the outputs is no longer possible.
Terminal 7 - “RMT.RST.” (remote reset) When low (0.5 VMAX) a manual reset
is performed. The outputs turn off (if activated) and the time display is reset.
As long as this terminal is low, the unit is held at reset.
POWER & OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Power and output connections are made to the terminal block located at the
rear of the unit.
The DC power is connected to terminals 1 and 2. The DC plus (+) power is
connected to terminal 1 and the minus (-) is connected to terminal 2.
Terminals 4 & 5 are used to connect to the solid-state outputs. Terminal 2 is
used as common for the solid-state outputs. When switching an inductive load
with solid state outputs, it is recommended that an EMI device such as a snubber
(RLC #SNUB0000) be installed at the load.
Note: Snubber leakage current can cause some electro-mechanical devices to
be held on.
FRONT PANEL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
These units employ eight front panel buttons for control and data entering.
The button functions are as described below:
RESET “R”: Resets the timer to either zero or preset, depending on the mode
of operation selected. For this button to operate, the enable/disable reset DIP
switch at the rear of the unit must be set to the enable (EN.) position. The
reset button is also used in conjunction with the preset buttons, to view and
change the timed output values. When reset is activated, all processes are
stopped or interrupted (i.e. outputs turn off, display is reset). This is the case
under any mode of operation, in any data entry mode.
PRESET “P1” and “P2”: The preset 1 value is displayed when the P1 button
is pressed, and the Preset Value mode is accessed (See Program Preset
Value). The value remains displayed for approximately 10 seconds after the
button is released.
The preset buttons are also used, in conjunction with the reset button, to view
and change the timed output values (See Program Timed Output Value.)
ENTER “E”: The Enter button is used when programming the Preset Value or
the Timed Output Value. After the desired value is obtained on the display,
pressing the E button enters the value into the unit’s internal memory and
takes effect immediately. Also the “E” button can be used to exit self-test.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
When wiring the unit, use the numbers on the label to identify the position
number with the proper function. All conductors should meet voltage and
current ratings for each terminal. Also cabling should conform to appropriate
standards of good installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended
that power supplied to the unit (AC or DC) be protected by a fuse or circuit
breaker. Strip the wire, leaving approximately ¼" bare wire exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder). Insert the wire into the terminal and tighten
down the screw until the wire is clamped tightly. Each terminal can accept up
to one 14-gauge, two 18-gauge or four 20-gauge wire(s). Wire each terminal
block in this manner.
DISPLAY SCROLLING
To set the display to scroll, press and hold the “E” button and then press the
left-most button on the front panel. To stop the scrolling, repeat the above step.
DISPLAY SCROLLING SEQUENCE
P1
Value of P1
P2
Value of P2
Time Value
INPUT CONNECTIONS
Input connections are made on the terminal block at the rear of the unit, refer
to numbers on the label to identify the position number with the proper function.
6
any of the front panel buttons except for the “R” button.
To enter self-test, press the two left-hand digit buttons (on the front panel)
simultaneously. At this time, the display will cycle all the digits each for about
half a second in the sequence shown below.
PROGRAM PRESET VALUE *
The factory default values are set to 5.00 for preset 1 and 10.00 for preset 2.
To enter a different value, the operator must enter the Preset Value
Programming Mode by performing the following steps.
DIGITS CYCLED ON THE DISPLAY
000000
111111
222222
333333
444444
555555
666666
777777
888888
999999
BLANK DISPLAY
101010
121212
323232
343434
545454
565656
767676
787878
989898
Note: During the displaying, changing, and entering of a new preset value, all
functions of the unit are operational (i.e. timing, resetting, outputs activating,
etc.)
FIRST: Press “P1” or “P2”. This displays the respective preset value, which
remains displayed for approximately 10 seconds after release of the last
button pushed. At this time, the preset display mode can be exited, without
change, by pressing the “E” button.
SECOND: Once the preset value is displayed, a specific digit can be
incremented by pressing the button directly beneath that digit. Pressing and
holding the button down will continuously scroll the digit from 0 through 9,
then back to 0 again. When the desired value for that digit is reached, release
the button. Repeat this step until the desired preset value is obtained.
THIRD: Press the “E” button to enter the value into the unit’s memory. As
Soon As the “E” button is pressed, the new preset value takes effect. If the
“E” button is not pressed within 10 seconds, the unit returns to normal
display operation with the previous value retained.
The next portion of self-test displays a group of four ones and zeros. The two
left-most digits represent the setting of the timer mode DIP switches, with the
first being min/sec and the second being 0.000T/0.00T. When the switch is
“DOWN”, the digit shows a zero. When the switch is “UP”, the digit shows a
one. The third digit always shows a zero. The fourth digit represents program
disable (PGM.DIS). A zero represents a high at this terminal and a one
represents a low. The second set of digits are the settings of the mode select DIP
switches (S2 to S5 at the rear of the unit). This pattern directly corresponds to
the number representing the mode of operation. If the switches are changed
while at this point in the self-test, the settings can be seen to change. These
changes do not affect timer operation immediately, but any changes take effect
when the self-test is exited. When the switch is “DOWN”, the digit shows a
zero. When the switch is “UP”, the digit shows a one.
When the mode switch settings are displayed, the outputs can be tested. To
activate the outputs, press “P1” for output 1 or “P2” for output 2. If no testing
of the outputs is required, press the “E” button until the unit exits self-test (the
unit returns to normal display mode). Also, if no activity occurs on the switches
or the front panel button within 18 seconds after the unit pauses at the mode
switch display, the unit automatically exits self-test.
PROGRAM TIMED OUTPUT VALUE *
The factory default Timed Output Value is 0.10 seconds, but can be
programmed from 0.01 to 99.99 seconds. To enter a different value, the operator
must enter the Timed Output Value Programming Mode by performing the
following steps.
Note: During the displaying, changing, and entering of a new timed output
value, all functions of the unit are operational (i.e. timing, resetting, outputs
activating, etc.)
FIRST: Set S1 Reset EN./DIS. switch to the UP position (Enable).
SECOND: Press and hold the “P1” or “P2” button and then press the “R”
button. The respective timed output value is displayed and remains displayed
for approximately 10 seconds after release of the last button pushed. At this
time, the timed output display mode can be exited, without change, by
pressing the “E” button.
THIRD: Once the timed output value is displayed, a specific digit can be
incremented by pressing the button directly beneath that digit. Pressing and
holding the button down will continuously scroll the digit from 0 through 9,
then back to 0 again. When the desired value for that digit is reached, release
the button. Repeat this step until the desired timed output value is obtained.
FOURTH: Press the “E” button to enter the value into the unit’s memory. As
Soon As the “E” button is pressed, the new timed output value takes effect,
if the output is not active at that time. If the output is active at the time of the
change, the new value will take effect the next time the output is activated.
If the “E” button is not pressed within 10 seconds, the unit returns to normal
display operation with the previous value retained.
Note: The “PGM.DIS.” terminal must be open or at 5 VDC for the
outputs to be activated.
Caution: The operator should use care when testing the outputs, so as
not to cause any undesirable or hazardous conditions in the system.
INITIAL POWER-UP & FACTORY SETTINGS
The following are the values set when shipped from the factory.
Preset 1
Preset 2
Time Value
Timed Output Values
* To enter any new data into the LNXNT, the “PGM.DIS.” terminal must be
open or at 5 VDC maximum.
=
=
=
=
5.00
10.00
0
0.10 second
DIP Switch Settings
All switches are moved to the “DOWN” position except for the reset enable
switch, which is moved “UP”. With the switches set in these positions, the unit
is operating in mode zero (latch-on at preset, manual reset to zero). Timing is
selected for seconds with two decimal places.
SELF-TEST
The self-test feature can be activated without affecting the time, missing a
preset point, affecting the timed output durations, or interfering with control
functions. This test verifies that all digits operate. Also, the DIP switch settings
and the outputs can be tested.
If the outputs are not tested, the state of the outputs remain the same as they
were prior to self-test. If the outputs are tested in self-test, the outputs will be
off after exiting self-test.
Rapid advance of the self-test routine can be done by pressing and releasing
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.
7
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging
process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to
operate the keypad of the unit.
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
Installation
The unit meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use, when
properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an
enclosed panel with a gasket to provide a water-tight seal. One
mounting clip and two screws with tinnerman nuts are provided for easy
installation. Consideration should be given to the thickness of the panel.
A panel which is too thin, may distort and not provide a water-tight seal.
(Recommended minimum panel thickness is 0.125" [3.18 mm].)
After the panel cut-out has been completed and deburred, carefully
slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
Insert the unit into the panel. As depicted in the drawing, install the
two tinnerman nuts and two self-tapping screws onto the mounting
clip. To install the mounting clip, hold the mounting clip with both
hands so that the top corners rest on the index finger of each hand and
the bottom corners rest on the middle finger of each hand. While doing
this, place the thumb of each hand over the mounting screws. By
pressing on the screws, flex the clip enough to slide it over the back
end of the case until the clip snaps into the groove of the bezel. Tighten
the two mounting screws.
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the
maximum operating temperature and provides good air circulation.
Placing the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be
avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Caution: Only minimum pressure is required to seal panel. Do NOT
overtighten mounting screws.
LNXNT TIMER APPLICATION
A candy manufacturer has a requirement to automatically shrink wrap their packaged candy. The boxed
candy is loaded onto a conveyor belt and sent to the automatic shrink wrap machine. The conveyor speed and
position is controlled by a PLC. However, an external time adjustment is required to allow for different size
boxes to be processed. Timing accuracy is very important to insure that the shrink wrap is sealed without
melting the candy. The Dual Preset LNXNT Timer is chosen due to its accuracy and the ability to easily change
the presets. Changing of the presets will meet the time requirements for different size packages.
As the package is moved into the shrink wrap machine, the PLC receives a signal that the package is in
position. At this time, the PLC sends a signal to close the Run Input switch of the LNXNT Timer. It takes 1.5
seconds for the machine to wrap the package. At the end of this time, Output 1 of the LNXNT Timer signals
the PLC to move the package to the shrink oven.
As soon as the PLC receives the signal from
the LNXNT, it opens the Run input switch
stopping timer operation while the package is
being placed in the oven. When the package is in
position, the PLC closes the Run Input switch.
This will restart the timer from 1.5 seconds. The
time required in the oven is 3 seconds, so Preset
2 is set for 4.5. When the timer reaches Preset 2,
output 2 signals the PLC to move the package out
of the oven. At the end of the cycle, the PLC
performs a reset via the Remote Reset terminal.
This action resets the timer to zero in preparation
for the next package.
Terminal Connections
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(5 VDC)
(Comm)
(RUN)
(01)
(02)
(PGM.DIS)
(RMT.RST)
Positive side of battery
Negative side of battery and key switch
To PLC
To PLC (move package to oven)
To PLC (remove package from oven)
To key switch
To PLC
Front Panel Programming
DIP Switch Settings
Preset 1
Preset 2
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
= 1.50
= 4.50 (this will give 3
sec. in the oven)
Timed Outputs = 10 seconds
Disable Reset
Up  Switches 2 to 5 set the mode of
Up  operation to Mode 1 (Timed Output
Up  Up at preset, Manual Reset to Zero)
Down
0.01
Sec
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE SUPPLY VOLTAGES
5 VDC
10-30 VDC
LNXNT
LNXNT
NPN Input/Output Dual Preset Timer
LNXN2T40
LNXN2T50
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures, & Panel Mount Kits, refer to the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.
Bulletin No. LNXT1/2-D
Drawing No. LP0291
Released 9/02
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion-controls.com
MODEL LNXT1 - SINGLE PRESET TIMER
MODEL LNXT2 - DUAL PRESET TIMER
!
0.3" (7.6 mm) HIGH, 6 DIGIT DISPLAY
!
UP/DOWN TIMING CAPABILITY
!
DISPLAY SCROLLING (SELECTABLE)
!
RELAY OUTPUT(S)
!
SOLID-STATE CURRENT SINKING OUTPUT(S)
!
PROGRAMMABLE TIMED OUTPUT(S) REMOTE RESET
CAPABILITY
!
SIMPLIFIED FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMING
!
ABILITY TO LOCK OUT FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS
!
ON-LINE SELF-TEST
!
AVAILABLE IN AC OR DC POWERED VERSIONS
!
4 TIME RANGES
0.01 SECONDS
0.01 MINUTES
0.001 SECONDS
0.001 MINUTES
!
SEALED FRONT PANEL CONSTRUCTION (NEMA 4X/IP65)
!
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (E2PROM)
DESCRIPTION
SAFETY SUMMARY
The Lynx Series of presettable timers is an economical and reliable solution
to single or dual preset level requirements. The Model LNXT1 is the single
preset version and the Model LNXT2 is the dual preset version. Both units
have a solid-state output and a Form C relay output for each preset. These units
feature a full compliment of control inputs, programmable timed outputs, nonvolatile memory, and many other features that satisfy most any single or dual
preset application.
The Lynx Timer has two main timing actions, Reset to Zero (RTZ) and
Reset to Preset (RTP). There are eight modes of operation for the single preset
unit and sixteen for the dual preset unit.
All parameters are programmed through the front panel buttons. The Lynx
timers have an internal non-volatile memory device which eliminates the need
for battery back-up. When power is removed or interrupted, this device
maintains all data set-ups necessary for system operation. A Program Disable
terminal is provided, which prevents accidental changes or tampering by
unauthorized personnel to the preset(s) or timed output values. The front panel
reset button can be enabled or disabled by a rear panel DIP switch. These
timers have an on-line self-test which can be run at any time without losing
time or missing a preset value.
Power, input, and output connections are made via removable terminal
blocks at the rear of the unit. DIP switches at the rear of the unit are used to
set the desired mode of operation and time ranges.
The Lynx Series of timers have a sealed high impact plastic bezel and meet
NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dust, when properly
installed.
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 2.7" (68.6)H x 4.0" (101.6)W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
1
11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY:
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use. Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power1
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms1
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6-digit, 0.3" (7.6 mm) high LCD display.
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Power Versions: 115 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz, 6 VA
230 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz, 6 VA
DC Power Versions: 11 to 14 VDC @ 100 mA.
21.5-30 VDC @ 100 mA.
3. RUN INPUT: Accepts switch contact closures and NPN open collector
outputs and similar types of current sinking inputs.
VIL = 0.5 V max., VIH = 2.2 V min., internally pulled up to 5 VDC through
a 10 KΩ resistor (ISNK = 0.5 mA). Response time = 1 msec. (These units
operate with VCM E through H modules)
4. TIME ACCURACY: ±0.01%
5. TIME RANGES:
Time
0.01 sec
0.001 sec
0.01 min
0.001 min
Max. Display
9999.99
999.999
9999.99
999.999
6. CONTROL INPUTS: Active low (VIL = 0.5 V max., VIH = 2.2 V min.),
internally pulled up to 5 VDC through a 10 KΩ resistor (ISNK = 0.5 mA).
Remote Reset: Response time = 10 msec. A low resets the unit and
deactivates outputs.
Program Disable: A low inhibits the changing of presets and timed outputs,
as well as testing outputs in self-test.
7. OUTPUTS:
Solid-State: Current sinking NPN open collector transistors.
ISNK = 100 mA max., VOH = 30 VDCMAX., VOL = 1 V @ 100 mA.
Relay: Form C contacts max. rating 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC, 28 VDC
(resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load). The operate time is
5 msec. nominal and the release time is 3 msec. nominal.
Relay Life Expectancy - 100,000 cycles at max. rating. (As load level
decreases, life expectancy increases.)
Programmable Timed Output: The timed output can be programmed from
0.01 sec. to 99.99 sec., ±0.1% + 10 msec. max.
8. MEMORY RETENTION: Non-volatile E2PROM retains all programmed
information when power is removed or interrupted.
Power Cycles(ON/OFF): 100,000 min.
Data Retention: 10 years min.
9. INPUT, POWER, AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS: Removable terminal
blocks.
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
Note:
1. Power lines had an external EMI line filter, (Red Lion #LFIL0000) or
equivalent, installed.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for
additional information.
12. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
Front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use, when
properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. (Panel
gasket, mounting clip, nut fasteners, and screws included with unit.)
13. WEIGHT: 0.8 lbs (0.36 kg).
SWITCH SET-UP
S1 - DIS.RST.: Disables front panel reset.
EN. RST.: Enables front panel reset.
S2 to S5: These are the mode select DIP switches.
See Modes of Operation for the switch settings of a specific mode.
S6 - 0.01: Sets the timer to display two decimal places.
0.001: Sets the timer to display three decimal places.
S7 - Sec.: Sets the timer to display in seconds.
Min.: Sets the timer to display in minutes.
2
MODES OF OPERATION, DIP SWITCH SET-UP
The DIP switches for the various operating modes are accessible from the
rear of the unit.
Note: A manual reset either from the front panel reset (if enabled) or remote
reset overrides any condition or state of the timer and begins the cycle
again.
Note: In modes four and twelve (Single Preset) and in modes four, five,
twelve, and thirteen (Dual Preset) the output may appear to be latched if
the time delay is longer than the time required for the timer to reach the
preset point or zero.
MODES OF OPERATION FOR SINGLE PRESET LYNX TIMER
MODE 0 LATCH OUTPUT AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times from zero, when the preset value is
reached, the output turns on and time continues to
accumulate. When a manual reset is performed, the
time resets to zero, the output turns off, and the cycle
starts again.
MODE 1 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times from zero, when the preset is
reached, the output turns on for the amount of time
programmed and time continues to accumulate.
When a manual reset is performed, the time resets to
zero and the cycle starts again.
MODE 2 & 3 - ✰✰
MODE 4 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET, AUTOMATIC RESET TO
ZERO AT PRESET
The unit times from zero, when the preset is
reached, the output turns on for the amount of time
programmed. At preset, the time automatically resets
to zero and starts the cycle over again.
MODE 5 - ✰✰
MODE 6 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET, AUTOMATIC RESET TO
ZERO AFTER THE TIMED OUTPUT
The unit times from zero, when the preset is
reached, the output turns on for the amount of time
programmed. At the end of the timed output, the time
automatically resets to zero, the output turns off, and
the cycle starts again.
MODE 7 - ✰✰
MODE 8 LATCH OUTPUT AT ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET
The unit times down from preset, when zero is
reached, the output turns on and time continues to
decrement. When a manual reset is performed, the
time resets to preset, the output turns off, and the cycle starts again.
✰✰ - These modes are not applicable to the Single Preset Lynx Timer (they are used only for the Dual Preset Timer unit).
3
MODES OF OPERATION FOR SINGLE PRESET LYNX TIMER (Cont’d)
MODE 9 TIMED OUTPUT AT ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET
The unit times down from preset, when zero is
reached, the output turns on for the amount of time
programmed and time continues to decrement. When a
manual reset is performed, the time resets to preset and the cycle starts
again.
MODE 10 & 11 - ✰✰
MODE 12 TIMED OUTPUT AT ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET TO
PRESET AT ZERO
The unit times down from preset, when zero is
reached, the output turns on for the amount of time
programmed. At zero, the time automatically resets to
preset and the cycle starts again.
MODE 13 - ✰✰
MODE 14 TIMED OUTPUT AT ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET TO
PRESET AFTER THE TIMED OUTPUT
The unit times down from preset, when zero is
reached, the output turns on for the amount of time
programmed. At the end of the timed output, the time
automatically resets to preset, the output turns off, and
the cycle starts again.
MODE 15 - ✰✰
✰✰ - These modes are not applicable to the Single Preset Lynx Timer (they are used only for the Dual Preset Timer unit).
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LYNX TIMER
MODE 0 LATCH OUTPUTS AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO
ZERO
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on and time continues to accumulate.
When preset 2 is reached, output 2 turns on and time
continues to accumulate. When a manual reset is performed, the time
resets to zero, the outputs turn off, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 1 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
turns on. Time continues to accumulate after the preset
levels have been reached. The outputs turn off after their respective
programmed time values. When a manual reset is performed, the time
resets to zero and the cycle starts again.
4
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LYNX TIMER (Cont’d)
MODE 2 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, LATCH OUTPUT 2
AT PRESET 2, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 1
turns off, and output 2 turns on. Time continues to
accumulate after the preset levels have been reached. Output 2
remains on until a manual reset occurs. Manual reset turns off both
outputs, the time resets to zero, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 3 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, TIMED OUTPUT 2
AT PRESET 2, MANUAL RESET TO ZERO
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 1
turns off and output 2 turns on for the amount of time
programmed. Time continues to accumulate after the
preset levels have been reached. When a manual reset is performed,
the time resets to zero, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 4 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, TIMED OUTPUT 2
AT PRESET 2, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO AT
PRESET 2
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
turns on for the amount of time programmed. At the
beginning of timed output 2, output 1 turns off, the
time automatically resets to zero, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 5 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, AUTOMATIC RESET TO
ZERO AT PRESET 2
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
turns on. The outputs turn off at the end of their
respective programmed time values. At preset 2, the
time automatically resets to zero and starts the cycle again.
MODE 6 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT PRESET 2, TIMED OUTPUT 2
AT PRESET 2, AUTOMATIC RESET TO ZERO AFTER
TIMED OUTPUT 2
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 1
turns off and output 2 turns on for the amount of time
programmed. At the end of timed output 2, the time automatically
resets to zero and starts the cycle again.
5
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LYNX TIMER (Cont’d)
MODE 7 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESETS, AUTOMATIC RESET TO
ZERO AFTER TIMED OUTPUT 2
The unit times from zero, when preset 1 is reached,
output 1 turns on. When preset 2 is reached, output 2
turns on. The outputs turn off at the end of their
respective programmed time values. At the end of timed output 2, the
time automatically resets to zero, and starts the cycle again.
MODE 8 LATCH OUTPUT AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, MANUAL
RESET TO PRESET 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on, when zero is reached, output
2 turns on. Time continues to decrement after the preset
levels have been reached. When a manual reset is
performed, the time resets to preset 2, the outputs turn off, and the
cycle starts again.
MODE 9 TIMED OUTPUT AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, MANUAL
RESET TO PRESET 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
2 turns on. The outputs turn off when their respective
programmed time values end. Time continues to
decrement after the preset levels have been reached. When a manual
reset is performed, the time resets to preset 2, and the cycle starts
again.
MODE 10 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, LATCH OUTPUT 2 AT
ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
2 turns on and output 1 turns off. Output 2 remains on
until a manual reset is performed. Time continues to decrement after
preset levels are reached. Manual reset turns off both outputs, if
activated, the time resets to preset 2, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 11 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, TIMED OUTPUT 2 AT
ZERO, MANUAL RESET TO PRESET 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
1 turns off and output 2 turns on for the amount of time
programmed. Time continues to decrement after the preset levels have
been reached. When a manual reset is performed, the time resets to
preset 2, and the cycle starts again.
6
MODES OF OPERATION FOR DUAL PRESET LYNX TIMER (Cont’d)
MODE 12 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, TIMED OUTPUT 2 AT
ZERO, AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET 2 AT ZERO
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
2 turns on for the amount of time programmed, output 1
turns off, and the time automatically resets to preset 2.
MODE 13 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO,
AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET 2 AT ZERO
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
2 turns on. The outputs turn off at the end of their
respective programmed time values. At zero, the time automatically
resets to preset 2 and the cycle starts again.
MODE 14 OUTPUT 1 TURN OFF AT ZERO, TIMED OUTPUT 2 AT ZERO,
AUTOMATIC RESET TO PRESET 2 AFTER TIMED OUTPUT 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
1 turns off and output 2 turns on for the amount of time
programmed. At the end of timed output 2, the time automatically
resets to preset 2, and the cycle starts again.
MODE 15 TIMED OUTPUTS AT PRESET 1 AND ZERO, AUTOMATIC
RESET TO PRESET 2 AFTER TIMED OUTPUT 2
The unit times down from preset 2, when preset 1 is
reached, output 1 turns on. When zero is reached, output
2 turns on. The outputs turn off at the end of their
respective programmed time values. At the end of timed
output 2, the time automatically resets to preset 2 and the cycle starts
again.
and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
POWER-UP DIAGNOSTICS
Upon applying power, the Lynx Timer performs an internal self-diagnostic
test of all the stored data. If the tests do not agree, a “P” appears on the right
side of the display. Normal operation of the unit will continue while the “P” is
displayed. Press the “E” button to remove the “P” and check all data set-up
values to be certain they are correct.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
7
Terminal 3 - “RUN” When this terminal is connected to common, time is
registered.
Terminal 4 - “COMM.” (common) Is the common line to which the sensor and
other input commons are connected. (Do NOT connect relay commons or
solid-state output commons to this point.)
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES (cont’d)
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through
the core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VB3
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubbers:
RLC #SNUB0000
POWER & OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
The input power and relay output connections are made to the bottom
terminal block (TBB), and the solid-state outputs are connected to the polarized
three-pin connector.
AC POWER WIRING
Primary AC power is connected to terminals 1 and 2 of TBB (marked VAC
50/60 Hz). To reduce the chance of noise spikes entering the AC line and
affecting the unit, the power should be relatively “clean” and within the ±10%
variation limit. Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits, or from circuits
that also power loads that cycle on and off(contactors, relays, motors,
machinery, etc.), should be avoided.
DC POWER WIRING
The DC power is connected to terminals 1 and 2 of TBB. The DC plus(+)
power is connected to TBB 1 and the minus(-) is connected to TBB 2.
USER INPUT WIRING
Internal user inputs PGM DIS and REM RST are digital inputs that are active
when connected to TB #4 Common. The use of shielded cable is recommended.
Follow the EMC Installation Guidelines for shield connection.
OUTPUT WIRING
Relay Connections
To prolong contact life and suppress electrical noise interference due to the
switching of inductive loads, it is good installation practice to install a snubber
(RLC #SNUB0000) across the contactor. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
When switching an inductive load with solid state outputs, it is
recommended that an EMI device such as a snubber be installed at the load.
Note: Snubber leakage current can cause some electro-mechanical devices to
be held ON.
Terminals 3, 4, and 5 of TBB are used to connect to output relay 1. Terminals
6, 7, and 8 of TBB (dual preset only) are used to connect to output relay 2
(Refer to block diagram).
WIRING CONNECTIONS
All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation, local
codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied to the unit (AC
or DC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the unit, remove the terminal block and use the numbers on the
label to identify the position number with the proper function. Strip the wire,
leaving approximately ¼" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be tinned
with solder). Insert the wire into the terminal and tighten down the screw until
the wire is clamped tightly. Each terminal can accept up to one 14-gauge, two
18-gauge or four 20-gauge wire(s). After the terminal block is wired, install it
into the proper location on the PC board. Wire each terminal block in this
manner.
Caution: Terminal blocks should NOT be removed with power applied to the
unit.
SOLID-STATE CONNECTIONS
The solid-state output connector has three wires (two wires for the single
preset unit) for connections.
Yellow wire - Solid-state output 1 (labeled 01 SNK.). Internally connects to an
NPN open collector transistor.
Black wire - Common for the solid-state output(s). This terminal should NOT
be used as the common for the input or control terminals.
Blue wire (dual preset only) - Solid-state output 2 (labeled 02 SNK.). Internally
connects to an NPN open collector transistor.
INPUT CONNECTIONS
Input connections are made
on terminal block TBA. Refer to
numbers on the label to identify
the position number with the
proper function. (The input
connections are the same for
single or dual preset timers.)
Terminal 1 - “REM.RST.”
(remote reset) When low (0.5
VMAX), a manual reset is
performed. The output(s) turn
off (if activated) and the time
display is reset. As long as
this terminal is low, the unit is
held at reset.
Terminal 2 - “PGM.DIS.” (program disable) When this terminal is left
open(unconnected), the following values can be programmed using the front
panel buttons:
FRONT PANEL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
These units employ eight front panel buttons for control and data entering.
The button functions are as described below:
RESET “R”: Resets the timer to either zero or preset, depending on the mode
of operation selected. For this button to operate, the enable/disable reset DIP
switch at the rear of the unit must be set to the enable (EN.) position. The
reset button is also used in conjunction with the preset button(s), to view and
change the timed output value(s). When reset is activated, all processes are
stopped or interrupted (i.e. outputs turn off, display is reset). This is the case
under any mode of operation, in any data entry mode.
PRESET “P1” (“P2”): Labeled P1 and P2 (single preset units only have the
P1 preset button).
The preset 1 value is displayed when the P1 button is pressed, and the Preset
Value mode is accessed (See Program Preset Value). The value remains
displayed for approximately 10 seconds after the button is released.
The preset buttons are also used, in conjunction with the reset button, to view
and change the timed output values (See Program Timed Output Value.)
ENTER “E”: The Enter button is used when programming the Preset Value or
the Timed Output Value. After the desired value is obtained on the display,
pressing the E button enters the value into the unit’s internal memory and
takes effect immediately. Also the “E” button can be used to exit self-test.
Preset Value(s)
Timed Output Value(s)
Outputs can also be tested during self-test under this condition (See Self-Test
description for further details). When terminal is low (0.5 VMAX), changing
these values and testing the outputs is no longer possible.
8
DISPLAY SCROLLING
SELF-TEST
To set the display to scroll, press and hold the “E” button and then press the
left-most button on the front panel. To stop the scrolling, repeat the above step.
The self-test feature can be activated without affecting the time, missing a
preset point, affecting the timed output durations, or interfering with control
functions. This test verifies that all digits operate. Also, the DIP switch settings
and the relay outputs can be tested.
If the outputs are not tested, the state(s) of the output(s) remain the same as
they were prior to self-test. If the outputs are tested in self-test, the outputs will
be off after exiting self-test.
Rapid advance of the self-test routine can be done by pressing and releasing
any of the front panel buttons except for the “R” button. (Pressing “R” at any
time, except when entering the timed output mode, resets the unit.)
To enter self-test, press the two left-hand digit buttons (on the front panel)
simultaneously. At this time, the display will cycle all the digits each for about
half a second in the sequence shown.
DISPLAY SCROLLING SEQUENCE
Single Preset
P1
Value of P1
Time Value
Dual Preset
P1
Value of P1
P2
Value of P2
Time Value
PROGRAM PRESET VALUE *
The factory default values are set to 5.00 for preset 1 and 10.00 for preset 2.
To enter a different value, the operator must enter the Preset Value
Programming Mode by performing the following steps.
Note: During the displaying, changing, and entering of a new preset value, all
functions of the unit are operational (i.e. timing, resetting, outputs activating,
etc.)
DIGITS CYCLED ON THE DISPLAY
000000
111111
222222
333333
444444
555555
666666
777777
888888
999999
BLANK DISPLAY
101010
121212
323232
343434
545454
565656
767676
787878
989898
FIRST: Press “P1”, (or “P2” if a dual preset unit). This displays the respective
preset value, which remains displayed for approximately 10 seconds after
release of the last button pushed. At this time, the preset display mode can be
exited, without change, by pressing the “E” button.
SECOND: Once the preset value is displayed, a specific digit can be
incremented by pressing the button directly beneath that digit. Pressing and
holding the button down will continuously scroll the digit from 0 through 9,
then back to 0 again. When the desired value for that digit is reached, release
the button. Repeat this step until the desired preset value is obtained.
THIRD: Press the “E” button to enter the value into the unit’s memory. As
Soon As the “E” button is pressed, the new preset value takes effect. If the
“E” button is not pressed within 10 seconds, the unit returns to normal
display operation with the previous value retained.
The next portion of self-test displays a group of four ones and zeros. The two
left-most digits represent the setting of the timer mode DIP switches, with the
first being min/sec and the second being .001T/.01T. The third digit always
shows a zero. The fourth digit represents program disable (PGM.DIS). A zero
represents a high at this terminal and a one represents a low. The second set of
digits are the settings of the mode select DIP switches (S2 to S5 at the rear of
the unit). This pattern directly corresponds to the number representing the mode
of operation. If the switches are changed while at this point in the self-test, the
settings can be seen to change. These changes do not affect timer operation
immediately, but any changes take effect when the self-test is exited. When the
switch is “DOWN”, the digit shows a one. When the switch is “UP”, the digit
shows a zero.
When the mode switch settings are displayed, the outputs can be tested. To
activate the output(s), press “P1” for output 1 or “P2” for output 2. If no testing
of the output(s) is required, press the “E” button until the unit exits self-test (the
unit returns to normal display mode). Also, if no activity occurs on the switches
or the front panel button within 18 seconds after the unit pauses at the mode
switch display, the unit automatically exits self-test.
Note: The “PGM.DIS.” terminal must be open for the outputs to be activated.
Caution: The operator should use care when testing the outputs, so as not to
cause any undesirable or hazardous conditions in the system.
* - To enter any new data into the Lynx, the “PGM.DIS.” terminal must be
open or at 5 V maximum.
PROGRAM TIMED OUTPUT VALUE *
The factory default Timed Output Value is 0.10 seconds, but can be
programmed from 0.01 to 99.99 seconds. To enter a different value, the operator
must enter the Timed Output Value Programming Mode by performing the
following steps.
Note: During the displaying, changing, and entering of a new timed output
value, all functions of the unit are operational (i.e. timing, resetting, outputs
activating, etc.)
FIRST: Set S1 Reset EN./DIS. switch to the DOWN position (Enable).
SECOND: Press and hold the “P1”, (or “P2” button if a dual preset unit) and
then press the “R” button. The respective timed output value is displayed and
remains displayed for approximately 10 seconds after release of the last
button pushed. At this time, the timed output display mode can be exited,
without change, by pressing the “E” button.
THIRD: Once the timed output value is displayed, a specific digit can be
incremented by pressing the button directly beneath that digit. Pressing and
holding the button down will continuously scroll the digit from 0 through 9,
then back to 0 again. When the desired value for that digit is reached, release
the button. Repeat this step until the desired timed output value is obtained.
FOURTH: Press the “E” button to enter the value into the unit’s memory. As
Soon As the “E” button is pressed, the new timed output value takes effect,
if the output is not active at that time. If the output is active at the time of the
change, the new value will take effect the next time the output is activated.
If the “E” button is not pressed within 10 seconds, the unit returns to normal
display operation with the previous value retained.
FACTORY SETTINGS
The following are the values set when shipped from the factory.
Preset 1
= 5.00
Preset 2
= 10.00 (Dual Preset Only)
Time Value
= 0
Timed Output Value(s)
= 0.10 second
All switches are in the “UP” position except for the reset enable switch,
which is “DOWN”. With the switches set in these positions, the unit is
operating in mode zero (latch-on at preset, manual reset to zero). Timing is
selected for seconds with two decimal places.
* - To enter any new data into the Lynx, the “PGM.DIS.” terminal must be
open or at 5 V maximum.
9
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel.
Do Not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils,etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
Installation
The unit meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use, when properly
installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel with a
gasket to provide a water-tight seal. One mounting clip and two screws with
tinnerman nuts are provided for easy installation. Consideration should be given
to the thickness of the panel. Too thin of a panel may distort and not provide a
water-tight seal. (Recommended minimum panel thickness is 0.125" [3.18 mm].)
After the panel cut-out has been completed and deburred, carefully slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the timer body to the back of the bezel. Insert the
unit into the panel. As depicted in the drawing, install the two tinnerman nuts and
two self-tapping screws onto the mounting clip. To install the mounting clip; hold
the mounting clip with both hands so that the top corners rest on the index finger
of each hand and the bottom corners rest on the middle finger of each hand.
While doing this, place the thumb of each hand over the mounting screws. By
pressing on the screws, flex the clip enough to slide it over the back end of the
Lynx case until the clip snaps into the groove of the bezel. Tighten the two
mounting screws.
Caution: Only minimum pressure is required to seal the panel. Do NOT
overtighten mounting screws.
APPLICATION FOR LYNX TIMER
machine to wrap a package 6" long. At the end of this time, Output 1 of the
Lynx Timer signals the PLC to move the package to the shrink oven. As soon
as the PLC receives the signal from the Lynx, it opens the Run input switch
stopping timer operation while the package is placed in the oven. When the
package is in position, the PLC closes the Run Input switch. This restarts the
timer from 1.5 seconds. The time required in the oven is 3 seconds, so Preset
2 is set for 4.5. When the timer reaches Preset 2, output 2 signals the PLC to
move the package out of the oven. At the end of the cycle, the PLC performs
a reset via the Remote Reset terminal. This action resets the timer to zero in
preparation for the next package.
CANDY WRAPPING OPERATION
A candy manufacturer has a requirement to automatically shrink wrap their
packaged candy. The boxed candy is loaded on a conveyor belt and sent to the
automatic shrink wrap machine. The conveyor speed and position is controlled
by a PLC. However, an external time adjustment is required to allow for
different size boxes to be processed.
Timing accuracy is very important to insure that the shrink wrap is sealed
without melting the candy. The Dual Preset Lynx Timer is chosen due to its
accuracy and the ability to easily change the presets. Changing of the presets
will meet the time requirements for different size packages.
As the package is moved into the shrink wrap machine, the PLC receives a
signal that the package is in position. At this time, the PLC sends a signal to
close the Run Input switch of the Lynx Timer. It takes 1.5 seconds for the
DIP Switches
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Disable Reset
Up
Switches 2 to 5 set the mode of
Up
operation to Mode 1 (Timed Output
Up
at preset, Manual Reset to Zero
Down
0.01
Sec
TBA Connections
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
1
2
3
4
(REM.RST)
(PGM.DIS)
(RUN)
(COMM.)
PLC Output
Key Switch
PLC Output
PLC
TBB Connections
Terminals
Terminals
Terminals
Terminals
1
4
7
3
&
&
&
&
2
5 (Relay 1)
8 (Relay 2)
6
Primary Power
PLC (move package to oven)
PLC (remove package from oven)
Not used
Front Panel Programming
Preset 1
Preset 2
Timed Output
10
1.50
4.50 (this will give 3 seconds in the oven)
10 seconds
ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE SUPPLY VOLTAGES
12VDC
24VDC
230VAC
115VAC
MODEL NO.
DESCRIPTION
LNXT1
Lynx Single Preset Timer
LNXT1020
LNXT1030
LNXT1010
LNXT1000
LNXT2
Lynx Dual Preset Timer
LNXT2020
LNXT2030
LNXT2010
LNXT2000
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits, refer to the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
11
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship
for a period limited to one year from the date of shipment, provided the products have been stored,
handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The Company’s liability under this limited
warranty shall extend only to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s
option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with
respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against
damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales of RLC products or products
containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal injuries, deaths, property
damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be
to any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety
Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those
expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers and limitations contained
herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
Red Lion Controls
20 Willow Springs Circle
Red Lion Controls BV
Basicweg 11b
Red Lion Controls Asia
31, Kaki Bukit Road 3 #06-02 TechLink
York PA 17402
NL - 3821 BR Amersfoort
Singapore 417818
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Tel +31 (0) 334 723 225
Tel +65 6744-6613
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
Fax +31 (0) 334 893 793
Fax +65 6743-3360
Bulletin No. PAXCK-D
Drawing No. LP0524
Released 1/04
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL PAX-1/8 DIN PRESET TIMER (PAXTM) &
REAL-TIME CLOCK (PAXCK)
C
UL
R
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
O
6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE DISPLAY
O
4 SEPARATE DISPLAYS (Timer, Counter, Real-Time Clock, and Date)
O
CYCLE COUNTING CAPABILITY
O
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUTS
O
FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)
O
COMMUNICATIONS AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/Plug-in card)
O
BUS CAPABILITIES: DEVICENET, MODBUS and PROFIBUS-DP
O
PC SOFTWARE AVAILABLE FOR METER CONFIGURATION
O
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
51EB
lists, allowing for two separate listings of setpoint values, timer start/stop
values, counter start/stop values and RTC daily on and off values.
The meters can have up to four setpoint outputs, determined by the optional
plug-in cards. The setpoint plug-in cards provide dual FORM-C relays (5A),
quad FORM-A relays (3A) or either quad sinking or quad sourcing open
collector logic outputs. The outputs can be assigned to the timer, counter, RTC
date, and RTC time. The outputs can also be independently configured to suit a
variety of control and alarm requirements.
Plug-in cards can also provide serial communications. These include RS232,
RS485, Modbus, DeviceNet, and Profibus-DP. Display values, setpoint alarm
values and setpoint states can be controlled through serial communications.
With the RS232 or RS485 communication card installed, it is possible to
configure the meter using a Windows® based program. The meter configuration
data can be saved to a file for later recall.
Once the meters have been initially configured, the parameter list may be
locked out from further modification entirely, or the setpoint, timer start/stop
values, counter start/stop values, RTC time SET, and Display Intensity can be
made accessible. This lockout is possible through a security code or user input.
The meters have been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The PAXTM (PAX Timer) and PAXCK (PAX Clock/Timer) offer many
features and performance capabilities to suit a wide range of industrial
applications. Both can function as an Elapsed Timer or Preset Timer, while the
PAXCK also offers Real-Time Clock with Date capability. The Plug-in option
cards allow the opportunity to configure the meter for the present application,
while providing easy upgrades for future needs.
Both units can function as an Elapsed Time Indicator. By using two separate
signal inputs and 23 selectable timer ranges, the meters can be programmed to
meet most any timing application. With the addition of a Plug-in Setpoint card,
they can easily become a dual or quad output preset timer.
The PAXCK can also operate as a Real-Time Clock (RTC), with the RealTime Clock Card already installed. The meter is capable of displaying time in
12 or 24-hour time formats. The 12-hour format can be displayed in hours and
minutes, with or without an AM/PM indication or in hours, minutes, and
seconds. The 24-hour format can be displayed in hours and minutes or in hours,
minutes, and seconds. The PAXCK is also capable of a calendar display in
which the day, month and/or year can be displayed. The meter will recognize
leap years, and can automatically adjust for Daylight Savings Time. The RealTime Clock has the ability to externally synchronize with other PAXCK meters
to provide a uniform display network throughout the plant.
If the application calls for both a Preset Timer and a Real-Time Clock at the
same time, the PAXCK can handle this requirement as well. The meter provides
up to four different displays, accessed via front panel push buttons or external
inputs. The displays are Timer (TMR), which displays the current timer value;
Count (CNT), which displays the current cycle counter value; Date (DAT),
which displays the current programmed date; and Real-Time Clock, which
displays the current time. A battery-backed Real-Time Clock plug-in card is
provided with the PAXCK. This card, which includes a lithium coin-cell battery,
will maintain the time and date when main power is removed.
The meters accept inputs from a variety of sources including switch contacts
and outputs from CMOS or TTL circuits. The input can be configured to trigger
on the edge or level of the incoming pulse. Internal jumpers are available to allow
the selection for sinking inputs (active low) or sourcing inputs (active high).
The front panel keys and three user inputs are programmable to perform
various meter functions. One of the functions includes exchanging parameter
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting
clip installation is 2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Plug-In Cards and Accessories . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Plug-In Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
4
5
5
6
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display . . . 9
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Factory Service Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Programming Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers
0
PAX
CK - Timer/Real Time Clock
TM - Timer
0 - Red, Sunlight Readable Display
1 - Green Display
0 - 85 to 250 VAC
1 - 11 to 36 VDC, 24 VAC
Option Card and Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE
MODEL NO.
PAXCDS
Optional
Plug-In
Cards
PAXCDC
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERS
Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card
PAXCDS10
Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card
PAXCDS20
Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card
PAXCDS30
Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card
PAXCDS40
RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block
PAXCDC10
Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector
PAXCDC1C
RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block
PAXCDC20
Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector
PAXCDC2C
DeviceNet Communications Card (Terminal Block)
PAXCDC30
Modbus Communications Card
PAXCDC40
Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector
PAXCDC4C
Profibus-DP Communications Card
PAXCDC50
PAXRTC
Real-Time Clock Card (Replacement Only)
PAXRTC00
SFPAX*
PC Configuration Software for Windows 3.x and 95/98 (3.5" disk)
*Software can be downloaded from www.redlion.net
2
SFPAX
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) red sunlight readable or standard green
LED
2. POWER:
AC Versions (PAXCK000, PAXTM000):
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 18 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs. (300 V working)
DC Versions (PAXCK010, PAXTM010):
DC Power: 11 to 36 VDC, 14 W
(Derate operating temperature to 40°C if operating <15 VDC and three
Plug-in cards are installed)
AC Power: 24 VAC, ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs (50 V working)
3. SENSOR POWER: 12 VDC, ±10%, 100 mA max. Short circuit protected.
4. ANNUNCIATORS:
TMR - Timer Display
SP1 - Setpoint 1 Output
CNT - Cycle Counter Display
SP2 - Setpoint 2 Output
DAT - Real-Time Clock Date Display
SP3 - Setpoint 3 Output
- Real-Time Clock Time Display
SP4 - Setpoint 4 Output
11. USER INPUTS: Three programmable user inputs
Logic inputs configurable as Current Sinking (active low) or Current
Sourcing (active high) through a single plug jumper.
Current Sinking (active low): VIL = 0.9 V max., 22K: pull-up to +12 VDC.
Current Sourcing (active high): VIH = 3.6 V min., 22K: pull-down, Max.
Continuous Input: 30 VDC.
Isolation To Timer Input Common: Not isolated
Response Time: 10 msec
12. MEMORY: Non-volatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters and
display values.
13. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C (0 to 45°C with all three plug-in
cards installed)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH non-condensing
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCE:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL3101-1, CSA C22.2 No.
1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL/5854B/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 02ME04503-04122002
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (rear of unit), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference
EN 55022
Enclosure class B
Power mains class B
5. KEYPAD: 3 programmable function keys, 5 keys total.
6. TIMER DISPLAY:
Timer Range: 23 Selectable Ranges
Timing Accuracy: ± 0.01%
Minimum Digit Resolution: 0.001 Sec.
Maximum Least Significant Digit Resolution: 1 Hr.
Maximum Display: 999999
7. CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY:
Counter Range: 0 to 999999
Digit Resolution: 1 cycle
Maximum Count Rate: 50 Hz
8. REAL-TIME/DATE DISPLAY (PAXCK):
Real-Time Display: 5 display formats
Hr/Min/Sec (12 or 24 Hr. format); Hr/Min (24 Hr.); Hr/Min (12 Hr. with
or without AM/PM indication)
Date Display: 7 display formats
Month/Day or Day/Month (numeric or 3-letter Month format);
Month/Day/Year or Day/Month/Year (all numeric);
Day of Week/Day (3-letter Day of Week format)
9. REAL-TIME CLOCK CARD: Field replaceable plug-in card
Time Accuracy: ± 5 secs./Month (1 min./year) with end-user calibration
Battery: Lithium 2025 coin cell
Battery Life Expectancy: 10 yrs. typical
Synchronization Interface: Two-wire multi-drop network (RS485 hardware),
32 units max., operates up to 4000 ft.
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
10. TIMER INPUTS A and B:
Logic inputs configurable as Current Sinking (active low) or Current
Sourcing (active high) via a single plug jumper.
Current Sinking (active low): VIL = 0.9 V max., 22K: pull-up to +12 VDC.
Current Sourcing (active high): VIH = 3.6 V min., 22K: pull-down, Max.
Continuous Input: 30 VDC.
Timer Input Pulse Width: 1 msec min.
Timer Start/Stop Response Time: 1 msec max.
Filter: Software filtering provided for switch contact debounce. Filter
enabled or disabled through programming.
If enabled, filter results in 50 msec start/stop response time for successive
pulses on the same input terminal.
Note:
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section for more information.
15. CONNECTIONS: High compression, cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
16. CONSTRUCTION: This meter is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
17. WEIGHT: 10.1 oz. (286 g)
3
OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.
ACCESSORIES
SETPOINT CARDS (PAXCDS)
The PAX and MPAX series has 4 available setpoint alarm output plug-in
cards. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. (Logic state of the
outputs can be reversed in the programming.) These plug-in cards include:
Adding Option Cards
The PAX and MPAX series meters can be fitted with up to three optional plugin cards. The details for each plug-in card can be reviewed in the specification
section below. Only one card from each function type can be installed at one time.
The function types include Setpoint Alarms (PAXCDS), Communications
(PAXCDC), and Real-Time Clock Card (PAXRTC). The plug-in cards can be
installed initially or at a later date.
PAXCDS10 - Dual Relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
PAXCDS20 - Quad Relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
PAXCDS30 - Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
PAXCDS40 - Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector
DUAL RELAY CARD
Type: Two FORM-C relays
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 240 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load),
1/8 HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with both relays energized not to exceed 5 amps
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Response Time: 5 msec. nominal with 3 msec. nominal release
Timed Output Accuracy: ±0.01% -10 msec.
COMMUNICATION CARDS (PAXCDC)
A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. When programming
the unit via RLCPro, a Windows® based program, the RS232 or RS485 Cards
must be used.
PAXCDC10 - RS485 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC1C - RS485 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC20 - RS232 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC2C - RS232 Serial (Connector)
AND
PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet
PAXCDC40 - Modbus (Terminal)
PAXCDC4C - Modbus (Connector)
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP
QUAD RELAY CARD
Type: Four FORM-A relays
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 250 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 3 amps @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load), 1/10
HP @ 120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with all four relays energized not to exceed 4 amps
Life Expectancy: 100K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Response Time: 5 msec. nominal with 3 msec. nominal release
Timed Output Accuracy: ±0.01% -10 msec.
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 or RS232
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Data: 7/8 bits
Baud: 300 to 19,200
Parity: No, Odd or Even
Bus Address: Selectable 0 to 99, Max. 32 meters per line (RS485)
Transmit Delay: Selectable for 2 to 50 msec or 50 to 100 msec (RS485)
DEVICENET™ CARD
Compatibility: Group 2 Server Only, not UCMM capable
Baud Rates: 125 Kbaud, 250 Kbaud, and 500 Kbaud
Bus Interface: Phillips 82C250 or equivalent with MIS wiring protection per
DeviceNet™ Volume I Section 10.2.2.
Node Isolation: Bus powered, isolated node
Host Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between DeviceNet™
and meter input common.
QUAD SINKING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sinking NPN transistors.
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: 100 mA max @ VSAT = 0.7 V max. VMAX = 30 V
Response Time: 400 µsec. nominal with 2 msec. nominal turnoff
Timed Output Accuracy: ±0.01% -10 msec.
MODBUS CARD
Type: RS485; RTU and ASCII MODBUS modes
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 minute.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
Baud Rates: 300 to 38,400.
Data: 7/8 bits
Parity: No, Odd, or Even
Addresses: 1 to 247.
Transmit Delay: Programmable; See Transmit Delay explanation.
QUAD SOURCING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sourcing PNP transistors.
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: Internal supply: 24 VDC ± 10% , 30 mA max. total
External supply: 30 VDC max., 100 mA max. each output
Response Time: 400 µsec. nominal with 2 msec. nominal turnoff
Timed Output Accuracy: ±0.01% -10 msec.
PROFIBUS-DP CARD
Fieldbus Type: Profibus-DP as per EN 50170, implemented with Siemens
SPC3 ASIC
Conformance: PNO Certified Profibus-DP Slave Device
Baud Rates: Automatic baud rate detection in the range 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
Station Address: 0 to 126, set by the master over the network. Address stored
in non-volatile memory.
Connection: 9-pin Female D-Sub connector
Network Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between Profibus
network and sensor and user input commons. Not isolated from all other
commons.
PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
The SFPAX is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the
PAX meter from a PC. Using the SFPAX makes it easier to program the PAX
meter and allows saving the PAX program in a PC file for future use. On-line
help is available within the software. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.
4
1.0 INSTALLING
THE
METER
Installation
The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when properly
installed. The meter is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare
the panel cutout to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the
meter. Slide the panel gasket over the
rear of the meter to the back of the
bezel. The meter should be
installed fully assembled.
Insert the meter into the
panel cutout.
While holding the meter in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the
meter so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The
panel latch should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve
a proper seal, tighten the latch screws evenly until the meter is snug in the panel
(Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
Installation Environment
The meter should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the meter near devices
that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the meter.
PANEL CUT-OUT
2.0 SETTING
THE
JUMPERS
To access the jumpers, remove the meter base from the meter case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.
Timer Input Logic Jumper
One jumper is used for the logic state of both timer inputs. Select the proper
position to match the input being used.
User Input Logic Jumper
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards. Remove
all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing inside of
the meter.
One jumper is used for the logic state of all user inputs. If the user inputs are
not used, it is not necessary to check or move this jumper.
Main
Circuit
Board
JUMPER SELECTIONS
The
SRC
USER
INPUT
JUMPER
SNK
TIMER
INPUT
JUMPER
SRC
SNK
5
indicates factory setting.
3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased optional cards that perform
specific functions. These cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter. The
Plug-in cards have many unique functions when used with the meters.
CAUTION: The Plug-in card and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge static
charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal
object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean
workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or
other contaminants that may contact the cards can adversely
affect circuit operation.
To Install:
1. With the case open, locate the Plug-in card connector for the card type to be
installed. The types are keyed by position with different main circuit board
connector locations. When installing the card, hold the meter by the rear
terminals and not by the front display board.*
2. Install the Plug-in card by aligning the card terminals with the slot bay in the
rear cover. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the tab on the Plug-in
card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
3. Slide the meter base back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
4. Apply the Plug-in card label to the bottom side of the meter. Do Not Cover
the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of the case must be
clean for the label to adhere properly. Apply the label to the area designated
by the large case label.
TOP VIEW
Quad Sourcing Open Collector Output Card Supply Select
* If installing the Quad sourcing Plug-in Card (PAXCDS40), set the jumper for
internal or external supply operation before continuing.
4.0 WIRING
THE
METER
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screwclamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
6
4.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power
DC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC
Terminal 1: +VDC
Terminal 2: -VDC
4.2 TIMER INPUT WIRING
Before connecting the wires, the Timer Input logic jumper should be verified for proper position.
Two Wire Proximity, Current Source
Current Sinking Output
Current Sourcing Output
Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink
Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source
Interfacing With TTL
Emitter Follower; Current Source
CAUTION: Timer Input common is NOT isolated from User Input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the timer input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential
of the User Input Common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.
4.3 USER INPUT WIRING
Before connecting the wires, the Timer Input logic jumper should be verified for proper position. When the user input is configured for cycle
count, in module 4, the count input should be wired between terminals 7 & 10.
Sinking Logic
Sourcing Logic
Terminals 7-9
Terminal 10
Terminals 7-9:
+ VDC through external switching device
Terminal 10:
-VDC through external switching device
Connect external switching device between the
appropriate User Input terminal and User Comm.
}
The user inputs of the meter are internally
pulled up to +12 V with 22 K: resistance.
The input is active when it is pulled low
(<0 .9 V).
The user inputs of the meter are internally
pulled down to 0 V with 22 K: resistance.
The input is active when a voltage greater
than 3.6 VDC is applied.
7
4.4 SETPOINT (ALARMS) WIRING
SOURCING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD
SETPOINT PLUG-IN CARD TERMINALS
SINKING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD
4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
RS232 Communications
RS485 Communications
The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the PAX is limited to 19.2k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. RS485 is therefore always half-duplex, that is,
data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.
RECEIVING DEVICE
PAX METER
+5V
Transmit
Enable
Terminal Block Connection Figure
33K
12
13
B(-)
A(+)
33K
14
COMM. *
15 NC
* OPTIONAL
Extended Comms Connection Figure
Terminal Block Connection Figure
RS232 is intended to allow two devices to communicate over distances up to
50 feet. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) transmits data on the Transmitted Data
(TXD) line and receives data on the Received Data (RXD) line. Data Computer
Equipment (DCE) receives data on the TXD line and transmits data on the RXD
line. The PAX emulates a DTE. If the other device connected to the meter also
emulates a DTE, the TXD and RXD lines must be interchanged for
communications to take place. This is known as a null modem connection. Most
printers emulate a DCE device while most computers emulate a DTE device.
Some devices cannot accept more than two or three characters in succession
without a pause in between. In these cases, the meter employs a busy function.
As the meter begins to transmit data, the RXD line (RS232) is monitored to
determine if the receiving device is “busy”. The receiving device asserts that it
is busy by setting the RXD line to a space condition (logic 0). The meter then
suspends transmission until the RXD line is released by the receiving device.
Extended Comms Connection Figure
8
4.6 REAL-TIME CLOCK WIRING (PAXCK)
Time synchronization between multiple
PAXCK meters can be accomplished through a
hardware interface on the Real-Time Clock option
card. This RS485 type interface allows connection
of up to 32 PAXCK meters in a two-wire
multidrop network, at distances up to 4000 ft.
In a synchronization network, one PAXCK
meter is programmed as the Host, while all other
meters are programmed as Slaves. Once every
hour, the Host meter outputs a time
synchronization pulse onto the network. Upon
receiving the synchronization pulse, each Slave
meter automatically adjusts the minutes and
seconds of its RTC Time setting to synchronize
with the Host.
5.0 REVIEWING
Real-Time Clock Synchronization Figure
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
KEY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
DSP
Index display through Timer, Cycle Counter, Date, and Time
Exit programming and return to Display Mode
PAR
Access Programming Mode
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
F1V
Function key 1; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 1 **
Increment selected parameter value or selections
F2W
Function key 2; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 2 **
Decrement selected parameter value or selections
RST
Reset (Function key) ***
Selects digit location in parameter values
* Cycle counter and Real-Time Clock displays are locked out in Factory Settings.
** Factory setting for the F1 and F2 keys is NO mode.
*** Factory setting for the RST key is (Reset Display)
9
6.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
DISPLAY MODE
The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. In this mode, the meter
displays can be viewed consecutively by pressing the DSP key. The
annunciators to the left of the display indicate which display is currently shown;
Timer (TMR), Cycle Counter (CNT), or Date (DAT). The Time Display for the
Real-Time Clock is shown with no annunciator. Any of these displays can be
locked from view through programming. (See Module 3.)
module in sequence. Note that Modules 5 through 8 are only accessible when
the appropriate plug-in option card is installed. If lost or confused while
programming, press the DSP key to exit programming mode and start over.
When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the meter settings
on the Parameter Value Chart and lock-out parameter programming with a User
Input or lock-out code. (See Modules 2 and 3 for lock-out details.)
PROGRAMMING MODE
FACTORY SETTINGS
Two programming modes are available.
Full Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Upon entering this mode, the front panel keys change to Programming Mode
operations. This mode should not be entered while a process is running, since
the meter timing functions and User Input response may not operate properly
while in Full Programming Mode.
Quick Programming Mode permits only certain parameters to be viewed and/or
modified. When entering this mode, the front panel keys change to
Programming Mode operations, and all meter functions continue to operate
properly. Quick Programming Mode is configured in Module 3. The Display
Intensity Level “” parameter is only available in the Quick Programming
Mode when the security code is non-zero. For a description, see Module 9—
Factory Service Operations. Throughout this document, Programming Mode
(without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming Mode.
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 9. This is a good
starting point if encountering programming problems. Throughout the module
description sections which follow, the factory setting for each parameter is
shown below the parameter display. In addition, all factory settings are listed on
the Parameter Value Chart following the programming section.
ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the module description sections which follow, the dual display with arrows
appears for each programming parameter. This is used to illustrate the display
alternating between the parameter (top display) and the parameter’s Factory
Setting (bottom display). In most cases, selections or value ranges for the
parameter will be listed on the right.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter
PROGRAMMING TIPS
The Programming Menu is organized into nine modules. (See above.) These
modules group together parameters that are related in function. It is
recommended to begin programming with Module 1 and proceed through each
«
ª Selection/Value
Factory Settings are shown.
STEP BY STEP PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS:
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR KEY)
NUMERICAL VALUE ENTRY (ARROW, RST & PAR KEYS)
The Programming Mode is entered by pressing the PAR key. If this mode is
not accessible, then meter programming is locked by either a security code or a
hardware lock. (See Modules 2 and 3 for programming lock-out details.)
For parameters which require a numerical value entry, the arrow keys can be
used to increment or decrement the display to the desired value. When an arrow
key is pressed and held, the display automatically scrolls up or scrolls down.
The longer the key is held, the faster the display scrolls.
In addition, the RST key can be used in combination with the arrow keys to
enter numerical values. The RST key is pressed to select a specific digit to be
changed, which blinks when selected. Once a digit is selected, the arrow keys
are used to increment or decrement that digit to the desired number. The RST
key is then pressed again to select the next digit to be changed. This “select and
set” sequence is repeated until each digit is displaying the proper number.
Pressing the PAR key stores and activates the displayed value, and also
advances the meter to the next parameter.
MODULE ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)
Upon entering the Programming Mode, the display alternates between and the present module (initially ). The arrow keys (F15 and F26) are used
to select the desired module, which is then entered by pressing the PAR key.
PARAMETER (MODULE) MENU (PAR KEY)
Each module has a separate parameter menu. These menus are shown at the
start of each module description section which follows. The PAR key is pressed
to advance to a particular parameter to be changed, without changing the
programming of preceding parameters. After completing a module, the display
will return to . From this point, programming may continue by selecting
and entering additional modules. (See MODULE ENTRY above.)
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (DSP KEY or PAR KEY at )
The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the DSP key (from anywhere
in the Programming Mode) or the PAR key (with displayed). This will
commit any stored parameter changes to memory and return the meter to the
Display Mode. If a parameter was just changed, the PAR key should be pressed
to store the change before pressing the DSP key. (If power loss occurs before
returning to the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)
PARAMETER SELECTION ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)
For each parameter, the display alternates between the parameter and the
present selection or value for that parameter. For parameters which have a list of
selections, the arrow keys (F15 and F26) are used to sequence through the list
until the desired selection is displayed. Pressing the PAR key stores and activates
the displayed selection, and also advances the meter to the next parameter.
10
6.1 MODULE 1 - TIMER INPUT PARAMETERS ()
PARAMETER MENU
, *
Module 1 is the programming module for the Timer Input Parameters. In the
Display Mode, the TMR annunciator indicates the Timer display is currently
being shown. An EXCHANGE PARAMETER LISTS feature, which includes
the Timer Start and Timer Stop Values, is explained in Module 2.
Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input
Time
Start
TIMER RANGE
«
ª SECONDS
MINUTES
HOURS
RANGE
SELECTION
Time Start,
Display Update
Display
Update
Time
Stop
Time Stop,
Display Update
INPUT B
MAXIMUM
DISPLAY
DISPLAY RESOLUTION
INPUT B
* - Timer is reset at Time Start edge.
MINUTES/SECONDS
1 SEC
0.1 SEC
0.01 SEC
0.001 SEC
1 SEC
0.1 SEC
0.01 SEC
«
ª
0.001 SEC
HOURS/MINUTES
1 MIN
0.1 MIN
0.01 MIN
0.001 MIN
1 MIN
0.1 MIN
TIMER INPUT FILTERING
Provides a 50 msec debounce for the Timer Inputs (A and B). Select when
using relays or switch contacts as a signal source.
0.01 MIN
0.001 MIN
HOURS/MINUTES/SECONDS
1 HR
0.1 HR
0.01 HR
0.001 HR
1 SEC
0.1 SEC
«
ª
DAYS/HOURS/MINUTES
1 MIN
TIMER INPUT OPERATION
«
ª , *
«
ª Time Time
Stop Start
«
ª
"
Time
Start
Time
Stop
Time
Start
TIMER START VALUE
to TIMER STOP VALUE
!
The Timer stops when this value is reached, regardless of the signal levels on
the Timer Inputs. Selecting ! will display the sub-menu where the Stop
Value can be set or changed. The Stop Value is entered in the same display
format as the Timer Range selected. This Stop condition is cleared when a
Timer Reset occurs. Select if a Stop Value is not being used.
Edge Triggered Operation -1 Input
Time
Stop
The Timer returns to this value whenever a Timer Reset occurs. The value is
entered in the same display format as the Timer Range selected. Non-zero
values are normally used for “timing down” applications, but they can also
provide an “offset” value when timing up.
, *
Level Active (Gated) Operation
TIMING DIRECTION
Timing direction can be reversed through a User Input. (See Module 2.)
This parameter determines how the Timer Input Signals affect the
“Run/Stop” status of the Timer. The timing diagrams below reflect a Sinking
input setup (active low). A Sourcing input setup (active high) is available
through plug jumper selection (see Section 2.0). In this case, the logic levels of
the timing diagrams would be inverted.
The Timer can also be stopped using a Timer Stop Value or a Setpoint. This
type of Stop condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs, or another start
edge is applied.
For and operation, Input B provides a level active Timer
Inhibit function. This function is also available through a User Input (see
Module 2). Timing diagrams are shown below for “” through “”
modes. The “” through “” modes are identical except the
timer display value is also reset at “Time Start” edges. In the “” and
“” modes, the timer display value remains held and only updates when
a Timer Start (Input A) or Timer Stop (Input B) edge occurs.
Time
Start
Time Start,
Display Update
INPUT A
Time
Stop
( = SEC; = MIN; = HR; = DAY)
DISPLAY
RESOLUTION
Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input,
with Display Hold
Time
Start
INPUT A
23 TIMER RANGE SELECTIONS
RANGE
MAXIMUM
SELECTION DISPLAY
, *
Time
Stop
INPUT A
INPUT A
INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)
INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)
«
ª * - Timer is reset at Time Start edge.
11
to FLASH TIMER ANNUNCIATOR
& «
ª
«
ª
TIMER RESET AT POWER-UP
!
The Timer can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.
This parameter allows the Timer annunciator (TMR) to flash when the Timer
is running or stopped/inhibited. Select if a flashing indicator is not desired.
TIMER INPUT STATE AT POWER-UP
' «
ª Determines the “Run/Stop” State of the Timer at Power-up. This parameter
does not apply to timer input operation.
- Timer Stopped at power-up, regardless of prior run/stop state
- Timer assumes the same run/stop state it was in prior to power-down
6.2 MODULE 2 - USER INPUT AND FRONT PANEL FUNCTION KEY
PARAMETERS (#)
PARAMETER MENU
Module 2 is the programming module for the rear terminal User Inputs and
front panel Function Keys.
Three rear terminal User Inputs are individually programmable to perform
specific meter control functions. While in the Display Mode, the function is
executed when the User Input transitions to the active state. Refer to the User
Input specifications for active state response times. Certain User Input functions
are disabled in “Full” Programming Mode. User Inputs should be programmed
while in the inactive state.
Three front panel Function Keys, F1, F2 and RST, are also individually
programmable to perform specific meter control functions. While in the Display
Mode, the primary function is executed when the key is pressed. Holding the
F1 or F2 Function Keys for three seconds executes a secondary function. It is
possible to program a secondary function without a primary function. The front
panel key functions are disabled in both Programming Modes.
In most cases, if more than one User Input and/or Function Key is
programmed for the same function, the maintained (level active) functions will
be performed while at least one of those User Inputs or Function Keys are
activated. The momentary (edge triggered) functions are performed every time
any of those User Inputs or Function Keys transition to the active state.
Some functions have a sublist of parameters, which appears when PAR is
pressed at the listed function. A sublist provides yes/no selection for Display
Values or Setpoints which pertain to the programmed function. The function
will only be performed on the parameters entered as in the sublist. If a User
Input or Function Key is configured for a function with a sublist, then that
sublist will need to be scrolled through each time, in order to access any
parameters for the User Inputs or Function Keys which follow.
«
ª
NO FUNCTION
ª
PROGRAMMING MODE LOCK-OUT
«
ª #
Programming Mode is locked-out, as long as activated (maintained action).
In Module 3, certain parameters can be setup where they are still accessible
during Programming Mode Lock-out. A security code can be configured to
allow complete programming access during User Input lock-out. This parameter
does not apply to the function keys. Program only one user input for this function.
EXCHANGE PARAMETER LISTS
«
ª ª
«
Two lists of parameter entries are available for the Timer/Counter Start and
Stop Values; Setpoint On/Off and Time-Out Values; and Setpoint Daily On/Off
Occurrence (for Real-Time Clock option). The two lists are named and
$. If a User Input is used to select the list, then is selected when
the User Input is in the inactive state and $ is selected when the User
Input is in the active state (maintained action). If a front panel Function Key is
used to select the list, then the list will toggle for each key press (momentary
action). The display will only indicate which list is active when the list is
changed or when entering any Programming Mode.
To program the values for and $, first complete the
programming of all the parameters. Exit programming and switch to the other
list. Re-enter programming and enter the Timer/Counter Start and Stop Values
(, , #, #
), and if applicable, the Setpoint On/Off and
Time-Out Values (, , , %, , , , %,
, , , %), and the Setpoint Daily On/Off Occurrence
(
, , , %, , , , %). If any
other parameters are changed, the other list values must be reprogrammed.
Program only one user input for this function.
«
With this selection, NO function is performed. This is the factory setting for
all user inputs and function keys except the Reset (RST) Key.
Note: When downloading an SFPAX program containing List A/B, make sure
that both the software and meter have the same list active. The active list in
an SFPAX program is the one being displayed in Input Setup and/or Setpoint
Alarms category.
12
DISPLAY SELECT (Level Active)
«
ª «
ª When active (maintained action), the meter continuously scrolls through all
displays that are not “locked-out” in the Display mode. (See Module 3 for
Display Lock-out details.) A sub-menu provides Scrolling Speed selection.
«
ª #
#
DISPLAY HOLD (Level Active)
«
ª When active (maintained action), the meter “freezes” the display values
entered as ! in the sublist, while normal meter operation continues internally.
Program only one user input for this function.
#
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
RTC Date
RTC Time
FACTORY
DISPLAY SELECT (Edge Triggered)
«
ª DISPLAY HOLD and RESET (Level Active Reset)
«
ª When activated (momentary action), the meter advances to the next display
that is not “locked-out” in the Display mode. (See Module 3 for Display Lockout details.)
When activated, the meter “freezes” the display values entered as ! in the
sublist, before performing an internal Maintained Reset on the selected
displays. This function does not apply to the RTC Time or Date displays.
DISPLAY RESET (Level Active)
«
ª DISPLAY
«
ª When active (maintained action), the meter continually resets only the
currently shown display. If the RTC Time or Date is displayed, this function
applies to the Outputs assigned to the RTC, and does not Reset the actual RTC
Time or Date display. (See Module 6 for details on Output Assignment and
Output Reset with Display Reset.)
ª
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
«
ª DISPLAY
«
ª $
«
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
FACTORY
INHIBIT (Level Active)
«
ª $
When active (maintained action), timing and counting ceases for the displays
entered as ! in the sublist. The inhibit function is not a or event in Setpoint programming. This function does not apply to RTC Time or
Date displays. Program only one user input for this function.
When active (maintained action), the meter continually resets the displays
entered as ! in the sublist. The sublist appears when the PAR key is pressed.
This function does not apply to the RTC Time or Date displays.
DISPLAY
FACTORY
When activated, the meter “freezes” the display values entered as ! in the
sublist, before performing an internal Momentary Reset on the selected
displays. This function does not apply to the RTC Time or Date displays.
Program only one user input for this function.
When activated (momentary action), the meter resets only the currently
shown display. This is the factory setting for the Reset (RST) key. If the RTC
Time or Date is displayed, this function applies to the Outputs assigned to the
RTC, and does not Reset the actual RTC Time or Date display. (See Module 6
for details on Output Assignment and Output Reset with Display Reset.)
«
ª Timer
Cycle Counter
«
ª «
ª MAINTAINED RESET (Level Active)
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY HOLD and RESET (Edge Triggered Reset)
DISPLAY RESET (Edge Triggered)
«
ª «
ª DISPLAY
FACTORY
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
FACTORY
CHANGE DIRECTION (Level Active)
MOMENTARY RESET (Edge Triggered)
«
ª ª
«
When active (maintained action), the timing or counting direction for the
display entered as ! in the sublist, will be reversed from the direction set by
the Timing Direction ( ) and/or Counting Direction (# ) parameters in
Modules 1 and 4. (Program only one User Input per display for this function.)
This function does not apply to RTC Time or Date displays.
When activated (momentary action), the meter resets the displays entered as
! in the sublist. Function does not apply to RTC Time or Date displays.
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
«
ª #( «
ª #( FACTORY
DISPLAY
13
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
FACTORY
CHANGE DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL
«
ª ª
«
«
ª )
OUTPUT SET (Level Active)
«
ª When activated (maintained action), the meter continually activates the
output for all Setpoints entered as ! in the sublist.
When activated (momentary action), the display intensity changes to the next
intensity level (of 4). The four levels correspond to Display Intensity Level
() settings of 0, 3, 8 & 15. The intensity level, when changed via the User
Input/Function Key, is not retained at power-down, unless Quick Programming
or Full Programming mode is entered and exited. The unit will power-up at the
last saved intensity level.
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
1
2
3
4
FACTORY
Note: The next two parameters only appear when an RS232 or RS485 Serial
Communications Card is installed in the meter.
OUTPUT SET (Edge Triggered)
«
ª PRINT REQUEST
«
ª '
ª
«
'
When activated (momentary action), the meter activates the output for all
Setpoints entered as ! in the sublist.
When activated, the meter issues a block print through the serial port. The
specific values transmitted during a print request are selected with the Print
Options parameter in Module 7. For User Inputs (level active), the meter
transmits blocks repeatedly as long as the input is active. For Function Keys,
(edge triggered) only one block is transmitted per key press.
DISPLAY
PRINT REQUEST and RESET (Edge Triggered)
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
1
2
3
4
«
ª DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
1
2
3
4
FACTORY
«
ª «
ª «
ª When activated (momentary action), the meter deactivates the output for all
Setpoints entered as ! in the sublist.
DISPLAY
When active (maintained action), the meter “holds” (maintains) the present
output state for all Setpoints entered as ! in the sublist. Does not apply to
Output Set and Reset User Inputs. Program only one user input for this function.
OUTPUT RESET (Edge Triggered)
Note: The remaining parameters only appear when a Setpoint Card is
installed in the meter.
«
ª FACTORY
When activated (maintained action), the meter continually deactivates the
output for all Setpoints entered as ! in the sublist.
FACTORY
OUTPUT HOLD (Level Active)
1
2
3
4
«
ª When activated (momentary action), the meter first issues a block print
through the serial port, and then performs a Momentary Reset on the displays
entered as ! in the sublist. The specific values transmitted in the print block
are selected with the Print Options parameter in Module 7. Only one transmit
and reset occurs per User Input activation or Function Key press.
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
OUTPUT RESET (Level Active)
«
ª «
ª «
ª FACTORY
14
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
1
2
3
4
FACTORY
6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY
AND PROGRAM
PARAMETERS
LOCK-OUT
(
#)
PARAMETER MENU
= Setpoint Number 1 thru 4
** These parameters only appear if a Setpoint option card is installed.
Module 3 is the programming module for setting the Display Lock-out
Parameters and the “Quick Programming Mode” Value Access Parameters. In the
Quick Programming mode, after the PROGRAM LOCKOUT PARAMETERS
and before the Security Code (#
), a Display Intensity Level ()
parameter is available when the security code is non-zero. It allows the display
intensity to be set to 1 of 16 levels (0-15).
TIMER & CYCLE COUNTER START/STOP VALUE ACCESS
« « # « #
«
ª
# ª # ª # ª #
Timer & Counter Start/Stop Values can be programmed for , , or #.
DISPLAY LOCK-OUT PARAMETERS
When operating in the Display Mode, the meter displays can be viewed
consecutively by repeatedly pressing the DSP key. The annunciators to the left
of the display indicate which display is currently shown. Timer (TMR), Cycle
Counter (CNT), or Date (DAT). The Time Display for the Real-Time Clock is
shown with no annunciator. Any of these displays can be locked from view with
the DISPLAY LOCK-OUT parameters. Using these parameters, each display
can be programmed for “Read” or “Lock” defined as follows:
SELECTION
Read
Lock
DISPLAY
#
PAXCK: REAL-TIME CLOCK TIME SETTING ACCESS
«
ª
#
This parameter can be programmed for or #. Selecting allows
setting or changing the RTC Time in Quick Programming mode.
DESCRIPTION
Visible in Display Mode
Not visible in Display Mode
SECURITY CODE
TIMER DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
PAXCK: REAL-TIME CLOCK DATE/TIME DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
« # « # « # «
ª
ª # ª # ª #
These displays can be programmed for or #. When a particular meter
function is not used, the Display Lock-out should be set to # for that display.
PROGRAM LOCK-OUT PARAMETERS (VALUE ACCESS)
“Full” Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and
modified. This programming mode can be locked with a Security Code and/or
a User Input. When locked, and the PAR key is pressed, the meter enters a
Quick Programming Mode. In this mode, access to Setpoint Values, Timer &
Cycle Counter Start/Stop Values, and Time Setting for the Real-Time Clock can
be programmed for “Read”, “Enter”, or “Lock” defined as follows:
SELECTION
Read
Enter
Lock
DISPLAY
#
#
«
ª
to
Entry of a non-zero value will cause the #
prompt to appear when trying
to access the “Full” Programming Mode. Access will only be allowed after
entering a matching security code or the universal unlock code of . With this
lock-out, a User Input would not have to be used for the Program Lock-out
function. Note however, the Security Code lock-out is overridden when an User
Input, configured for Program Lock-out (
#), is not active (See Chart.)
SECURITY USER INPUT USER INPUT MODE WHEN “PAR”
CODE
SELECTION
STATE
KEY IS PRESSED
Visible, not changeable, in Quick Programming Mode
not
#
————
not 0
not
#
After Quick Programming
———— Quick Programming with correct Security
code entry
Visible and changeable in Quick Programming Mode
Not visible in Quick Programming Mode
not 0
not 0
' «
ª
#
0
0
Setpoint Values for SP1 thru SP4 can be programmed for , , or #.
' and ' are only displayed when they apply to the Setpoint Action
(#') programmed for that particular Setpoint. (See Module 6 for details.)
FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS
0
DESCRIPTION
' «
ª
#
PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS
SETPOINT 1 to 4 VALUE ACCESS ** ('' = 1 thru 4)
' «
ª
#
#
#
#
#
#
Active
Not Active
Active
Not Active
Full Programming Immediate access
After Quick Programming
Quick Programming with correct Security
code entry
Full Programming Immediate access
Quick Programming No access
Full Programming Immediate access
Throughout this bulletin, Programming Mode (without Quick in front) always
refers to “Full” Programming.
15
6.4 MODULE 4 - CYCLE COUNTER PARAMETERS (%#)
PARAMETER MENU
Module 4 is the programming module for the Cycle Counter Parameters. In the
Display Mode, the CNT annunciator indicates the Cycle Counter display is
currently being shown. An EXCHANGE PARAMETER LISTS feature, which
includes the Cycle Counter Start and Stop Values, is explained in Module 2.
CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE
# «
ª CYCLE COUNTER COUNT SOURCE
#* «
ª %
The Cycle Counter returns to this value whenever a Cycle Counter Reset
occurs. Non-zero values are normally used for “down counting” applications,
but they can also provide an “offset” value when counting up.
%
CYCLE COUNTER STOP VALUE
This parameter selects the source from which a count is added to or
subtracted from the Cycle Counter. Select if the Cycle Counter is not
being used, which will exit the module and bypass the remaining parameters.
When is selected, a count is generated each time the User 1 Input is
activated. When selected as the count source, User Input 1 can still be
programmed to perform a User Function described in Module 2, if desired. In
this case, the Cycle Counter would be counting the number of times the
particular User Function occurred.
The Timer Reset () selection generates a count when either a manual
or automatic reset occurs. (See Module 6 for programming Automatic Resets.)
The Output ON/OFF selections generate a count when the chosen output
either activates or deactivates. These selections only appear when a Setpoint
Card is installed. O3 and O4 selections only appear for Quad Setpoint cards.
+#
«
ª
!
The Cycle Counter stops counting when this value is reached, regardless of
the operation of the Timer. Selecting ! will display the sub-menu where
the Stop Value can be set or changed. The Stop condition is cleared when a
Cycle Counter Reset occurs. Select if a Stop Value is not used.
+& «
to CYCLE COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP
CYCLE COUNTER COUNTING DIRECTION
# «
ª
to # «
ª
!
The Cycle Counter can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.
Counting direction can be reversed through a User Input. (See Module 2.)
6.5 MODULE 5 - TIMER OPERATING MODES (
)
This module can only be accessed if a Setpoint Card is installed.
PARAMETER MENU
* Only the value parameters which apply to the selected mode will appear.
PREDEFINED TIMER OPERATING MODE
The Predefined modes control the activation and deactivation of Output 1, in
relation to Start and Reset signals applied to the Timer inputs. (See timing
diagrams which follow.) When a selection other than is chosen, the
parameters for Setpoint 1 () in Module 6 are automatically configured to
implement the selected operating mode. For some modes, parameters in
Modules 1 and 2 are also automatically configured to properly implement the
predefined mode. Refer to the chart shown with the timing diagrams for the
specific parameters loaded for each predefined mode. Also, note the specific
external wiring or plug jumper settings required for some modes.
The Setpoint On/Off or Time-out values for the specific application should
be entered directly in Module 5 after selecting the operating mode. Only the
value parameters which apply to the selected mode are displayed. These values
can also be entered through Module 6, Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters, if desired.
Select if not using a Predefined Operating Mode, in which case Setpoint
parameters must all be individually programmed for the particular application.
- On-Delay Timing
« - Off-Delay Timing
ª
- Repeat Cycle Timing
- On-Delay/Interval Timing
- Interval Timing (Level Triggered)
- Interval Timing (Edge Triggered)
This parameter is used to select Predefined Operating Modes for the Timer.
These modes cover a variety of timing applications frequently encountered in
industrial control processes. When using a Predefined mode, the operator needs
only to set the actual Setpoint On/Off or Time-out values for the particular
application. However, each programming parameter will still be accessible, in
order to make modifications to the predefined settings if desired.
16
Timing Diagrams for Predefined Timer Operating Modes
NOTE: Input A is shown as a Sourcing input (active high). If a Sinking input (active low) is used, the logic levels for Input A would be inverted.
!
On-Delay Timing
Input A
Input A
T
Output 1
T
T1
Output 1
!
Off-Delay Timing
T2
T
Interval Timing (Level triggered)
Input A
Input A
T
T
Output 1
The input signal must be wired to both the Input A and
User Input 1 terminals. The Timer Input plug jumper and
the User Input plug jumper must be set to opposite
positions (one SNK, one SRC) and the Input signal must
be a current sinking type (i.e. pulls input to common).
Repeat Cycle Timing
T
T
Output 1
The input signal must be wired to both the Input A and
User Input 1 terminals. The Timer Input plug jumper and
the User Input plug jumper must both be set to the
same position (either both SNK or both SRC).
Interval Timing (Edge triggered)
Input A
Output 1
,
On-Delay / Interval Timing
Input A
T1
T2
T1
T
T
Output 1
T
Parameter Settings for Predefined Timer Operating Modes
MODULE 1 - Timer Input Parameters ()
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
Timer Input Operation
N/A
N/A
()
MODULE 2 - User Input Parameters (#)
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
User Input 1
N/A
Reset Key
N/A
MODULE 6 - Setpoint Parameters (-)
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
Setpoint Select
Setpoint Assignment
Setpoint Action
Output Logic
Setpoint On
Setpoint On Value
T*
N/A
T1*
T1*
N/A
N/A
Setpoint Off
N/A
N/A
Setpoint Off Value
N/A
T*
T2*
N/A
T*
Time-out Value
N/A
N/A
N/A
T2*
N/A
Timer Stop
Timer/Counter Auto Reset
Output Reset w/display Reset
Setpoint Annunciator
Power-up State
N/A
N/A
T*
* Refer to timing diagrams. These parameters are the actual Setpoint On/Off or Time-Out values set by the user for the specific application.
17
6.6 MODULE 6 - SETPOINT (ALARM) PARAMETERS (-)
This module can only be accessed if a Setpoint Card is installed.
PARAMETER MENU
' = Setpoint Number 1 thru 4
Module 6 is the programming module for the Setpoint (Alarm) Output
Parameters. This programming module can only be accessed if a Setpoint card
is installed. Depending on the card installed, there will be two or four Setpoint
outputs available. The Setpoint Assignment and Setpoint Action parameters
determine the applicable Setpoint features, and dictate which subsequent
parameters will appear for the Setpoint being programmed.
' «
ª
' «
ª .&
SETPOINT SELECT
%
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
# # #
' «
ª .&
This parameter determines the mode for output deactivation as shown below.
Output activation is controlled by the SETPOINT ON parameter setting.
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Latched Output Mode
Timed Output Mode
On-Off Output Mode
%
%
to SETPOINT OFF
%
%
The Setpoint Off parameter only appears when the Setpoint Action (#')
is programmed for On-Off Output mode (
). In this mode, this parameter
determines when the Setpoint output will deactivate. Output deactivation can
occur at a specific Setpoint Off Value () or can be triggered by various
“events”, as shown in the parameter list. Such events include the Timer starting
() or stopping (
), or by the action (event) that causes another
Setpoint output to turn On or Off. When programmed for an event, the Setpoint
must not be used as the Setpoint Off event for another Setpoint.
Selecting will display a sub-menu where the Setpoint Off value is
entered. The Setpoint Off value is based on the meter display to which the
Setpoint is assigned ('). When assigned to the Timer or Cycle Counter, the
value is entered in the same format as the assigned display. When assigned to
the Real-Time Clock Date Display (#), the date value is entered in
month.day.year format ('',,). When assigned to the Real-Time Clock Time
Display (#), the value is always entered in format (Hours-Minutes
with AM/PM selection).
SETPOINT ACTION
#
SETPOINT ON
' «
ª Select the meter display to which the Setpoint is assigned: Timer (),
Cycle Counter (#), Real-Time Clock Date display (#) or Real-Time
Clock Time display (#). (The # and # selections only appear if a
Real-Time Clock option card is installed.)
By selecting , the Setpoint is not assigned to a specific display.
However, the output can still be activated (set) and deactivated (reset) by
various “events”. Such events include the Timer starting or stopping, or another
Setpoint output turning On or Off. The output can also be set and reset through
a User Input function or through serial communications.
#' «
ª #
This parameter determines when the Setpoint output will activate. Output
activation can occur at a specific Setpoint Value () or can be triggered by
various “events”, as shown in the parameter list. Such events include the Timer
starting () or stopping (
), or by the action (event) that causes
another Setpoint output to turn On or Off. When programmed for an event, the
Setpoint must not be used as the Setpoint On event for another Setpoint.
Selecting displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint value is entered. The
Setpoint value is based on the meter display to which the Setpoint is assigned
('). When assigned to the Timer or Cycle Counter, the Setpoint value is
entered in the same format as the assigned display. When assigned to the RealTime Clock Date Display (#), the date value is entered in month.day.year
format ('',,). When assigned to the Real-Time Clock Time Display (#),
the Setpoint value is always entered in format (Hours-Minutes with
AM/PM selection). In Setpoint One-shot mode (See Daily On Occurrence), the
One-shot Setpoint is enabled (armed) by scrolling the AM/PM digit until the 2nd
digit decimal point is lit.
Select the Setpoint (alarm) output to be programmed. This provides access to
the parameters for that particular Setpoint. The “'” in the following parameter
displays, reflects the chosen Setpoint number (1 thru 4). After the chosen
Setpoint is programmed, the display returns to . Select the next
Setpoint to be programmed and continue this sequence for each Setpoint. Select
to exit the module. and % apply to Quad Setpoint cards only.
' «
ª Normal Output Logic (
) turns the output “on” when activated and “off”
when deactivated. Reverse Output Logic () turns the output “off” when
activated and “on” when deactivated.
This section of the bulletin replaces the bulletin shipped with the Dual and
Quad Setpoint plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using Setpoint
plug-in cards with the PAXCK and PAXTM.
«
ª
OUTPUT LOGIC
OUTPUT DEACTIVATES
At Reset (Manual or Automatic)
After “Time-Out Value” Elapses
Based on “Setpoint Off” Setting
' «
ª The and selections are not available when Setpoint is assigned
to #.
18
to TIME-OUT VALUE
' «
ª ' «
ª
to The Time-Out Value only appears when the Setpoint Action (#') is
programmed for Timed Output mode (
). In this mode, the Time-Out Value
is the Setpoint Output time duration, from activation to deactivation. This value
is always entered in minutes, seconds, and hundredths of seconds format. The
maximum Time-Out Value is 99 minutes 59.99 seconds.
TIMER STOP
Timer stops when the Setpoint output activates (
) or deactivates (
).
Select if the output should not affect the Timer Run/Stop status.
Stopping the Timer as a result of this parameter does not constitute a condition (event) for the Setpoint On or Setpoint Off parameters.
TIMER/COUNTER AUTO RESET
PAXCK: DAILY ON OCCURRENCE
' «
ª
' «
ª
!
When the Setpoint output activates (
) or deactivates (
), the meter
automatically resets the Setpoint Assignment display ('). Select if the
Setpoint output should not cause the assigned display to reset. Does not apply
to manual activations or deactivations by user input, function key, or serial
communications.
This parameter only appears when the Setpoint is assigned (') to the
Real-Time Clock Time display (#). This parameter determines the days of
the week when the Setpoint output will activate.
Selecting , displays a sublist for choosing the days of the week. On all
days entered as , in the sublist, the output will activate. On all days entered
as , the output will not activate. The output activation is repetitive, and will
occur every week on the chosen day(s).
OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
/'
"0'
/
1
(/
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
FACTORY
' «
ª
!
!
!
!
!
' «
ª
Normal (
)
Reverse ()
Flash ()
Off (
)
/'
"0'
/
1
(/
DESCRIPTION
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
– Annunciator displayed when output is “on” (activated)
– Annunciator displayed when output is “off” (deactivated)
– Annunciator and display flashes when output is “on” (activated)
– Annunciator disabled
' «
ª
!
This parameter only appears when the Setpoint is assigned (') to the
Real-Time Clock Time display (#) and when the Setpoint Action (#')
is programmed for On-Off Output mode (
). In this mode, this parameter
determines the days of the week when the Setpoint output will deactivate.
Selecting , displays a sublist for choosing the days of the week. On all
days entered as , in the sublist, the output will deactivate. On all days entered
as , the output will not deactivate. The output deactivation is repetitive, and
will occur every week on the chosen day(s).
DISPLAY
SETPOINT ANNUNCIATOR
This parameter controls the illumination of the LED annunciator for the
corresponding Setpoint output (') as follows:
PAXCK: DAILY OFF OCCURRENCE
!
When ! is selected, the Setpoint output will reset when the Setpoint
Assignment display (') resets. Select if the Setpoint output should not
reset when the assigned display resets.
Setpoint One-Shot Mode
If all days are set to , the Setpoint will operate in “One-shot” mode. When
a One-shot setpoint is enabled (armed), the setpoint output will activate at the
set time and disable itself from activating again. To enable or re-enable a oneshot alarm, go to the Setpoint value entry display and press the Up or Dn key
repeatedly while the AM/PM digit is selected (flashing). When the 2nd digit
decimal point is lit, the Setpoint is enabled. The Setpoint enable status is saved
at power-down. The enable state of the Setpoint is not affected or changed when
the Parameter List is exchanged.
The setpoint will turn off (de-activate) as programmed per the Setpoint
Action selected. If mode is selected, program all the Daily Off days to
! to have the Setpoint turn off at the next Daily Off Occurrence. The Oneshot status can also be viewed or set from the Setpoint Off value entry display.
' «
ª
SETPOINT POWER-UP STATE
Determines the on/off state of the Setpoint output at power-up. Regardless of
output logic setting (normal or reverse).
FACTORY
!
!
!
!
!
19
– Deactivates the Setpoint output at power-up
– Activates the Setpoint output at power-up
– Restores the output to the state it was in prior to power-down
6.7 MODULE 7 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (2)
This module can only be accessed if a Serial Communications Card is installed.
PARAMETER MENU
* Only appears if the Real-Time Clock Card is installed.
Module 7 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the PAX
with those of the host computer or other serial device, such as a terminal or
printer. This programming module can only be accessed if an RS232 or RS485
Serial Communications card is installed.
This section also includes an explanation of the commands and formatting
required for communicating with the PAX. In order to establish serial
communications, the user must have host software that can send and receive
ASCII characters. Red Lion’s SFPAX software can be used for configuring the
PAX. (See ordering information.) For serial hardware and wiring details, refer
to section 4.5 Serial Communication Wiring.
$$ «
ª
-
-
# «
ª
!
DATA BITS
2
!
This parameter determines the formatting of the Real-Time Clock (RTC)
values transmitted from the meter in response to a Transmit Value (T) command
or a Block Print Request (P) command. This parameter appears only when a
Real-Time Clock plug-in option card is installed.
When ! is selected, RTC values are formatted as per the RTC Time and
Date Display Formats programmed in Module 8. The Day of Week value is sent
as a character string.
When is selected, the meter sends the RTC values as numeric data only.
This selection allows the RTC values to be recognized by the Red Lion HMI
products. RTC Time/Date units are separated by a “.”. The Day is sent as a
single number as shown below.
%
Set the baud rate to match the other serial communications equipment on the
serial link. Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value at which all the
serial equipment are capable of transmitting and receiving data.
«
ª
2
!
PAXCK: REAL-TIME CLOCK PRINT FORMATTING
BAUD RATE
%3
This parameter determines the formatting of data transmitted from the meter
in response to a Transmit Value (T) command or a Block Print Request (P)
command. Select for a Full print transmission, which consists of the meter
address, mnemonics, and parameter data. Select , for abbreviated print
transmissions, consisting of the parameter data only. This setting affects all the
parameters selected in the PRINT OPTIONS. (Note: If the meter address is 00,
the address will not be sent during a Full transmission.)
This section of the PAXTM/CK bulletin replaces the bulletin shipped with the
RS232 and RS485 serial communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate
bulletin when using those serial plug-in cards with the PAXTM/CK. Also, this
section does NOT apply to the DeviceNet, Modbus, or Profibus-DP
communication cards. For details on the operation of the Fieldbus cards, refer
to the bulletin shipped with each card.
$ «
ª -
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
TIME - Hours (24-Hr. format), Minutes, Seconds (HHMMSS)
DATE - Month, Day, Year (mmddyy)
DAY - 1 = Sunday thru 7 = Saturday
3
Select either 7- or 8-bit data word lengths. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.
ª
«
PARITY BIT
ª
This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A Print Request is sometimes referred to as a block print because more
than one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting , displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the block print. All parameters entered as , in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as will not be sent.
This parameter only appears when the Data Bits parameter is set to a 7-bit
data word length. Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial
communications equipment on the serial link. The meter ignores parity when
receiving data and sets the parity bit for outgoing data. If parity is set to , an
additional stop bit is used to force the frame size to 10 bits.
«
ª
«
PRINT OPTIONS
DISPLAY
METER ADDRESS
to Enter the serial meter (node) address. With a single meter, an address is not
needed and a value of zero can be used. With multiple meters (RS485
applications), a unique 2 digit address number must be assigned to each meter.
PARAMETER
Timer
Cycle Counter
RTC Date*
RTC Time*
Setpoint Values*
Setpoint Off/Time-Out Values*
Timer/Cnt Start & Stop Values
* These values are plug-in card dependent.
20
FACTORY
MNEMONIC
TMR
CNT
DAT
TIM
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SO1 SO2 SO3 SO4
TST TSP CST CSP
SENDING SERIAL COMMANDS AND DATA
Command String Examples:
When sending commands to the meter, a string containing at least one
command character must be constructed. A command string consists of a
command character, a value identifier, numerical data (if writing data to the
meter) followed by the command terminator character * or $.
1. Address = 17, Write 350 to Setpoint 1
String: N17VE350$
Command Chart
3. Address = 0, Reset Timer value
String: RA*
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
2. Address = 5, Cycle Counter value, response time of 50 to 100 msec. min.
String: N05TB*
NOTES
N
Node (Meter) Address Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
Specifier
node address. Not required when address = 00.
T
Transmit Value (read)
Read a register from the meter. Must be
followed by register ID character.
V
Value change (write)
Write to register of the meter. Must be followed
by register ID character and numeric data.
R
Reset
P
Block Print Request
(read)
Transmitting Data To the Meter
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to Transmit Details listed in the
Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. The meter ignores any
decimal point and conforms the number to the scaled resolution. (ie. The meter’s
scaled decimal point position is set for 0.0 and 25 is written to a register. The value
of the register is now 2.5. In this case, write a value of 250 to equal 25.0).
Reset a register or output. Must be followed
by register ID character
Initiates a block print output. Registers are
defined in programming.
For RTC Time [C] and Date [D] Value:
Time - 24 Hours, Minutes, Seconds (HHMMSS)
Ex: 083000 = 8:30 AM, 144500 = 2:45 PM
Date - Month, Day, Year (mmddyy)
Ex: 123101 = December 31, 2001
Command String Construction
The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to invalid commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
Day - 1 = Sunday through 7 = Saturday
EX: 3 = Tuesday
1. The first characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed by a
1 or 2 character address number. The address number of the meter is
programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node address
itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the Register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a Register ID character.
It prints according to the selections made in print the options. If constructing
a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is sent next.
4. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See Timing Diagram figure for differences
between terminating characters.
Note: On a change value command (V), if the command string is terminated
with the * character, all values are stored in E2PROM memory. Values are
not stored if the $ terminator is used.
Notes:
1. Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.
2. The date and day must be set separately.
Transmitting Data From the Meter
Data is transmitted from the meter in response to either a transmit command
(T), a print block command (P) or User Function print request. The response
from the meter is either a full field transmission or an abbreviated transmission.
The meter response is established in Module 7.
Full Transmission ($$ = )
Register Identification Chart
ID
VALUE DESCRIPTION
REGISTER
2
NAME 1 COMMAND TRANSMIT DETAILS
3
A
Timer Value
TMR
T, V, R
6 digit
B
Cycle Counter Value
CNT
T, V, R
6 digit
C
RTC Time Value
TIM
T, V
6 digit
D
RTC Date Value
DAT
T, V
6 digit
E
Setpoint 1
SP1
T, V, R
6 digit
F
Setpoint 2
SP2
T, V, R
6 digit
G
Setpoint 3
SP3
T, V, R
6 digit
H
Setpoint 4
SP4
T, V, R
6 digit
I
Setpoint 1 Off Value
SO1
T, V
6 digit
J
Setpoint 2 Off Value
SO2
T, V
5 digit
K
Setpoint 3 Off Value
SO3
T, V
6 digit
L
Setpoint 4 Off Value
SO4
T, V
6 digit
M
Timer Start Value
TST
T, V
6 digit
O
Cycle Counter Start Value
CST
T, V
6 digit
Q
Timer Stop Value
TSP
T, V
6 digit
S
Cycle Counter Stop Value
CSP
T, V
6 digit
U
Auto/Man Register
MMR
T, V
0 - auto, 1 - manual
W
Day of Week Value
DAY
T, V
1 = Sun....7 = Sat
X
Setpoint Register
SOR
T, V
0 - not active, 1 - active
3
BYTE
DESCRIPTION
1, 2
3
4-6
7-18
19
20
21
22
23
2 byte Node (Meter) Address field [00-99]
<SP> (Space)
3 byte Register Mnemonic field
12 byte numeric data field: 6 bytes for number, up to 3 for decimal points.
<CR> (Carriage return)
<LF> (Line feed)
<SP> (Space)3
<CR> (Carriage return)3
<LF> (Line feed)3
These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the unit address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the unit address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field is 12 characters long
(decimal points are loaded depending on timer range selected). The data is rightaligned with leading spaces for any unfilled positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with <CR> and <LF>. When a
block print is finished, an extra <SP>, <CR>, and <LF> are used to provide
separation between the transmissions.
1. Register Names are also used as Register Mnemonics during full transmission.
2. The registers associated with the P command are set up in Print Options (Module 7).
3. Unless otherwise specified, the Transmit Details apply to both T and V
Commands.
21
Abbreviated Transmission ($$ = !)
BYTE
DESCRIPTION
1-12
13
14
15
16
17
12 byte data field, 6 bytes for number, up to 3 bytes for decimal points.
<CR> (Carriage return)
<LF> (Line feed)
Auto/Manual Mode Register (MMR) ID: U
This register sets the controlling mode for the outputs. In Auto Mode (0) the
meter controls the setpoint output. In Manual Mode (1) the outputs are defined
by the registers SOR. When transferring from auto mode to manual mode, the
meter holds the last output value (until the register is changed by a write). Each
output may be independently changed to auto or manual. In a write command
string (VU), any character besides 0 or 1 in a field will not change the
corresponding output mode.
<SP> (Space)3
<CR> (Carriage return)3
<LF> (Line feed)3
U abcd
3
These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the address and register mnemonics,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.
Note: Transmissions are formatted to match the way the parameter is displayed.
This includes setpoints.
Example: SP1 assigned to RTC. RTC format = 12:00 P.
SP1 printout = 12:00 P.
Note: When communicating with a Red Lion Controls HMI unit, set # in
programming module 7 (serial) to . This formats the RTC parameters to:
Time - 24 Hours, Minutes, Seconds
Date - Month, Day, Year
Day - 1 = Sunday through 7 = Saturday
Decimal points are substituted for all punctuation.
d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1
Example: VU0011 places SP3 and SP4 in manual.
Setpoint Output Register (SOR) ID: X
This register is used to view or change the states of the setpoint outputs.
Reading from this register (TX) will show the present state of all the setpoint
outputs. A “0” in the setpoint location means the output is inactive and a “1”
means the output is active. The output logic parameter in Module 6 will affect
the active logic state.
X abcd
Meter Response Examples:
d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1
1. Address = 17, full field response, Cycle Counter = 875
17 CNT
875 <CR><LF>
2. Address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 2 = 250.5
SP2
250.5<CR><LF>
3. Address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 2 = 250, last line of block print
250<CR><LF><SP><CR><LF>
In Automatic Mode, the meter controls the setpoint output state. In Manual
Mode, writing to this register (VX) will change the output state. Sending any
character besides 0 or 1 in a field or if the corresponding output was not first in
manual mode, the corresponding output value will not change.
Example: VX10* will result in output 1 active and output 2 inactive.
COMMAND RESPONSE TIME
SERIAL TIMING
The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). During RS232 transmissions, the meter ignores commands while
transmitting data, but instead uses RXD as a busy signal. When sending
commands and data to the meter, a delay must be imposed before sending
another command. This allows enough time for the meter to process the
command and prepare for the next command.
Refer to the Timing Diagrams below. At the start of the time interval t1, the
computer program prints or writes the string to the com port, thus initiating a
transmission. During t1, the command characters are under transmission and at
the end of this period, the command terminating character (*, $) is received by
the meter. The time duration of t1 is dependent on the number of characters and
baud rate of the channel.
COMMENT
PROCESS TIME (t2)
R
V
T
Reset
Write
Transmit
P
Print
2-50 msec.
100-200 msec.
2-50 msec. for $
50-100 msec. for *
2-50 msec. for $
50-100 msec. for *
COMMAND
Timing Diagrams
NO REPLY FROM METER
t1 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies. If no response from the meter is expected, the meter is ready
to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character. The '*' terminating character results in a
response time window of 50 msec. minimum and 100 msec. maximum. This
allows sufficient time for the release of the sending driver on the RS485 bus.
Terminating the command line with '$' results in a response time window (t2) of
2 msec. minimum and 50 msec. maximum. The faster response time of this
terminating character requires that sending drivers release within 2 msec. after
the terminating character is received.
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. At the end of t3, the meter
is ready to receive the next command.
RESPONSE FROM METER
t3 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
22
COMMUNICATION FORMAT
Data is transferred from the meter through a serial communication channel.
In serial communications, the voltage is switched between a high and low level
at a predetermined rate (baud rate) using ASCII encoding. The receiving device
reads the voltage levels at the same intervals and then translates the switched
levels back to a character.
The voltage level conventions depend on the interface standard. The table
lists the voltage levels for each standard.
LOGIC
INTERFACE STATE
RS232*
RS485*
1
mark (idle)
TXD,RXD; -3 to -25 V
a-b < -200 mV
0
space (active)
TXD,RXD; +3 to +25 V
a-b > +200 mV
Start Bit and Data Bits
Data transmission always begins with the start bit. The start bit signals the
receiving device to prepare for reception of data. One bit period later, the least
significant bit of the ASCII encoded character is transmitted, followed by the
remaining data bits. The receiving device then reads each bit position as they
are transmitted.
Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The PAX meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.
* Voltage levels at the Receiver
Data is transmitted one byte at a time with a variable idle period between
characters. Each ASCII character is “framed” with a beginning start bit, an
optional parity bit and one or more ending stop bits. The data format and baud
rate must match that of other equipment in order for communication to take
place. The figures list the data formats employed by the meter.
Stop Bit
The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single bit
period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of a
new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit. If 7 data bits and no parity is selected, then 2
stop bits are sent from the PAX.
Character Frame Figure
6.8 MODULE 8 - REAL-TIME CLOCK PARAMETERS (3#) - PAXCK
PARAMETER MENU
Module 8 is the programming module for the Real-Time Clock (RTC) Date
and Time Parameters. In the Display Mode, the DAT annunciator indicates the
RTC Date is currently being shown. The RTC Time display is shown with no
annunciator. This programming module can only be accessed if a Real-Time
Clock card is installed.
«
ª
«
ª
!
"''!! «
ª This parameter sets the Time for the Real-Time Clock. Selecting ! will
display the sub-menu where the Time can be set or changed. The RTC Time is
entered in “Hours-Minutes”, 12-hour format, with AM/PM indication. When
the PAR key is pressed, the new Time is entered and begins running. The
“Seconds” always start from 00 when the Time is entered. Select to advance
to the next parameter without changing the Time.
«
ª !
This parameter sets the Date for the Real-Time Clock. Selecting ! will
display the sub-menu where the Date can be set or changed. The RTC Date is
entered in “Month.Day.Year” format (two-digit values). When the PAR key is
pressed, the new Date is entered. Select to advance to the next parameter
without changing the Date.
SET TIME
SET DATE
ª
HOURS-MINUTES Am/Pm
&, «
/'
MONTH.DAY.YEAR
SET DAY
/'
(/
0'
/
&
Set the Day of the week for the Real-Time Clock.
23
1
«
ª «
ª
TIME DISPLAY FORMAT
to -
Selecting , for the # parameter displays the sub-menu where the
present Offset value can be viewed or changed. The tables below show the
value to enter, given the amount of time gained or lost in a 30-day period.
Select the format in which the Real-Time Clock Time will be displayed. The
format selections depict the range for the RTC Time display, and DO NOT
represent the current RTC Time. When the meter is operating in the Display
Mode, the RTC Time display is shown with no annunciator.
Values 00 and 32 provide no Offset, and are not shown in the tables.
IF RTC CLOCK GAINED TIME:
USE VALUE FROM THIS TABLE
SECONDS ENTER THIS SECONDS ENTER THIS
GAINED IN
OFFSET
GAINED IN
OFFSET
30 DAYS
VALUE
30 DAYS
VALUE
DATE DISPLAY FORMAT
«
ª 4&
!
Select the format in which the Real-Time Clock Date will be displayed. The
format selections depict the range for the RTC Date display, and DO NOT
represent the current RTC Date. When the meter is operating in the Display
Mode, the RTC Date display is indicated by the DAT annunciator.
AUTO CHANGE FOR DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME
#( «
ª
!
Selecting , allows the meter to automatically adjust the RTC Time for
Daylight Savings Time. (Adjustment dates are U.S.A. standard only.) Avoid
setpoints that occur during adjustment (Sundays 1 to 3 AM).
METER TYPE FOR CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION
!# «
ª ª
90
17
02
95
18
16
03
100
19
21
04
105
20
26
05
111
21
32
06
116
22
37
07
121
23
42
08
127
24
47
09
132
25
53
10
137
26
58
11
142
27
63
12
148
28
69
13
153
29
74
14
158
30
79
15
163
31
84
16
IF RTC CLOCK LOST TIME:
USE VALUE FROM THIS TABLE
SECONDS ENTER THIS SECONDS ENTER THIS
LOST IN 30
OFFSET
LOST IN 30
OFFSET
DAYS
VALUE
DAYS
VALUE
CALIBRATE REAL-TIME CLOCK
01
Time synchronization between multiple PAXCK meters can be accomplished
through a hardware interface on the Real-Time Clock option card. This RS485
type interface allows connection of up to 32 PAXCK meters in a two-wire
multidrop network, at distances up to 4000 ft. (See Section 4.6, Real-Time
Clock Wiring).
In a Synchronization network, one PAXCK meter is programmed as the Host
(
), while all other meters are programmed as Slaves (). Once every
hour (at 30 min. past the hour), the Host meter outputs a time synchronization
pulse onto the network. Upon receiving the synchronization pulse, each Slave
meter automatically adjusts the Minutes and Seconds of its RTC Time setting
to synchronize with the Host.
Note: Synchroniaztion adjusts the Minutes and Seconds only, and does not
change the Hours, AM/PM, Day or Date settings in the Slave meter's RTC.
# «
5
11
!
* NOTE: DO NOT ADJUST TRIM CAP ON RTC CARD!
The Real-Time Clock circuit uses a crystal controlled oscillator for high
accuracy timekeeping. The oscillator is factory calibrated* and optimized for
25°C ambient temperature operation. Since the PAXCK is designed to operate
over a wide temperature range, and since the accuracy of a crystal oscillator
varies with ambient temperature, some drift in the RTC time may be observed
over an extended period. This is primarily seen in high or low temperature
installations. To compensate for the wide operating temperature range, a
calibration or “Offset” value can be entered, which effectively slows down or
speeds up the clock to maintain accurate timekeeping.
To calibrate the RTC, install the meter in its normal operating environment,
and set the time based on a known accurate reference (such as the WWV
broadcast or the Atomic Clock reference which is available via the internet).
After 30 days of normal operation, compare the RTC time to the reference, and
note the amount of time gained or lost. Refer to the tables on the next page for
the proper Offset value to enter, given the amount of time drift observed.
24
11
33
179
49
21
34
190
50
32
35
200
51
42
36
211
52
53
37
221
53
63
38
232
54
74
39
243
55
84
40
253
56
95
41
264
57
105
42
274
58
116
43
285
59
127
44
295
60
137
45
306
61
148
46
316
62
158
47
327
63
169
48
6.9 MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (#)
PARAMETER MENU
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL
«
ª
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS
#
«
ª --
Use the RST and/or arrow keys to display #
-- and
press PAR. The meter will display and then returns
to #
. Press DSP key to return to the Display Mode.
This will overwrite all programmed user settings with the
Factory Default Settings shown in the Parameter Value Chart. For the PAXCK,
the Time and Date stored in the Real-Time Clock, as well as the RTC
Claibration Offset value, are NOT overwritten by this parameter. However, the
Time and Date Display Formats will revert back to the Factory Default Settings.
Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (0-15) by
using the arrow keys. The display will actively dim or
brighten as the levels are changed. This parameter also
appears in Quick Programming Mode when enabled.
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
PROBLEM
REMEDIES
NO DISPLAY
CHECK: Power level, power connections
PROGRAMMING LOCKED-OUT
CHECK: User input set for program lock-out function is in Active state
ENTER: Security code requested
CERTAIN DISPLAYS ARE LOCKED-OUT
CHECK: Display Lock-out programming in Module 3
MODULES or PARAMETERS NOT ACCESSIBLE
CHECK: Corresponding plug-in card installation, Program Lock-out/ Value Access
parameter programming in Module 3
TIMER NOT RUNNING
CHECK: Input wiring, Timer plug jumper setting, Timer input programming in Module 1,
input signal level, Timer Inhibited by Input B or a user input
USER INPUT NOT WORKING PROPERLY
CHECK: User input wiring, user input plug jumper setting, user input signal level,
user input programming in Module 2
OUTPUTS NOT WORKING PROPERLY
CHECK: Setpoint plug-in card installation, wiring, Setpoint programming in Module 6
REAL-TIME CLOCK NOT WORKING PROPERLY
CHECK: RTC plug-in card installation, RTC programming in Module 8, check for
proper battery installation, replace battery. DO NOT ADJUST TRIM CAP ON RTC CARD!
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS NOT WORKING
CHECK: Serial plug-in card installation, Serial wiring, Serial settings in Module 7,
host settings
ERROR CODE (%)
PRESS: Reset key (If unable to clear, contact factory.)
Shaded areas are model dependent.
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship
for a period limited to one year from the date of shipment, provided the products have been stored,
handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The Company’s liability under this limited
warranty shall extend only to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s
option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with
respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against
damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales of RLC products or products
containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal injuries, deaths, property
damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be
to any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety
Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those
expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers and limitations contained
herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
25
PARAMETER VALUE CHART
PAXCK Clock Timer
Programmer ________________ Date ________
Meter# _____________ Security Code __________
Display and Program Lock-out Parameters
Timer Input Parameters
DISPLAY
#
$
!
PARAMETER
TIMER RANGE
TIMER INPUT OPERATION
TIMER INPUT FILTERING
TIMING DIRECTION
TIMER START VALUE (A)
TIMER START VALUE (B)*
TIMER STOP (A & B*)
TIMER STOP VALUE (A)
TIMER STOP VALUE (B)*
FLASH TIMER ANNUNCIATOR
TIMER INPUT STATE AT POWER-UP
TIMER RESET AT POWER-UP
FACTORY
SETTING
DISPLAY
USER SETTING
User Input and Function Key Parameters
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
USER INPUT 1
USER INPUT 2
USER INPUT 3
FUNCTION KEY 1
FUNCTION KEY 2
RESET KEY
SECONDARY FUNCTION KEY F1
SECONDARY FUNCTION KEY F2
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
PARAMETER
TIMER DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
CYCLE COUNT DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
RTC DATE DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
RTC TIME DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
SP1 ON VALUE ACCESS
SP1 OFF VALUE ACCESS
SP1 TIME-OUT VALUE ACCESS
SP2 ON VALUE ACCESS
SP2 OFF VALUE ACCESS
SP2 TIME-OUT VALUE ACCESS
SP3 ON VALUE ACCESS
SP3 OFF VALUE ACCESS
SP3 TIME-OUT VALUE ACCESS
SP4 ON VALUE ACCESS
SP4 OFF VALUE ACCESS
SP4 TIME-OUT VALUE ACCESS
TIMER START VALUE ACCESS
TIMER STOP ACCESS
COUNTER START VALUE ACCESS
COUNTER STOP VALUE ACCESS
RTC TIME SETTING ACCESS
SECURITY CODE
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
Cycle Counter Parameters
DISPLAY
"
PARAMETER
CYCLE COUNTER COUNT SOURCE
CYC. CNTR. COUNTING DIRECTION
CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE (A)
CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE (B)*
CYCLE COUNTER STOP (A & B*)
CYCLE COUNTER STOP VALUE (A)
CYCLE COUNTER STOP VALUE (B)*
CYC. CNTR. RESET AT POWER-UP
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
Timer Operating Modes
DISPLAY
* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.
26
PARAMETER
PREDEFINED TIMER OPER. MODE
SETPOINT 1 ON VALUE
SETPOINT 1 OFF VALUE
SETPOINT 1 TIME-OUT VALUE
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
'
DISPLAY
*!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters
PARAMETER
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
USER SETTING
FACTORY
SETTING
DAILY ON OCCURRENCE (A)
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
DAILY ON OCCURRENCE (B)*
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
DAILY OFF OCCURRENCE (A)
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
DAILY OFF OCCURRENCE (B)*
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
Mon-Fri
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
SETPOINT ACTION
OUTPUT LOGIC
SETPOINT ON (A)
SETPOINT ON (B)*
SETPOINT ON VALUE (A)
SETPOINT ON VALUE (B)*
SETPOINT OFF (A)
SETPOINT OFF (B)*
SETPOINT OFF VALUE (A)
SETPOINT OFF VALUE (B)*
TIME-OUT VALUE (A)
TIME-OUT VALUE (B)*
TIMER STOP
TIMER/COUNTER AUTO RESET
OUTPUT RESET W/DISPLAY RESET
SETPOINT ANNUNCIATOR
POWER-UP STATE
%
Serial Communication Parameters
DISPLAY
&
&&
#
FACTORY
SETTING
PARAMETER
BAUD RATE
DATA BITS
PARITY BIT
METER UNIT ADDRESS
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
REAL-TIME CLOCK PRINT FORMAT
PRINT OPTIONS
TIMER DISPLAY
CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY
RTC DATE DISPLAY
RTC TIME DISPLAY
SETPOINT VALUES
SETPOINT OFF/ TIME-OUT VALUES
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
)
Real-Time Clock Parameters
DISPLAY
USER SETTING
(
'
%
PARAMETER
TIME DISPLAY FORMAT
DATE DISPLAY FORMAT
AUTO TIME CHANGE FOR D.S.T.
SYNCHRONIZATION UNIT TYPE
CALIBRATE REAL-TIME CLOCK
RTC CALIBRATION OFFSET VALUE
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
Factory Service Parameters
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL
* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.
PAXCK Application
A big application request has always been for
Real-Time Clocks to display time throughout the
plant. The challenge has been to keep all the
various clock locations synchronized with the
right time. With the new PAXCK Timer/RealTime Clock this problem is history. The clocks can
be provided in three different sizes, the PAXCK
(0.56 inch LEDs), the LPAXCK (1.5 inch LEDs),
or the EPAX (4 inch LEDs). You can mix and
match any number of the two versions, up to a
maximum of 32 units. Simply select one of the
units in the system as the host and the balance are
programmed as slaves. The host will send out a
synchronization pulse every hour to correct the
time on any clock unit wired in the system.
Real-Time Clock Synchronization Network
27
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR
#
#
%#
-
2
3#
#
F1/F2 Keys
'
Display
Intensity
Level
Factory Service
Code
#
Set Date
Set Time
Set Day
!
Parity Bit
$$
'
#
Setpoint
Time-Out
Value Access
#(
Auto Change
for Daylight
Savings Time
Date Display
Format
Real-Time Clock
Print Formatting
#
'
Power-up
State
Meter Type
for Clock
Synchronization
Timer Reset
at Power-up
' = Setpoint number
Calibrate
Real-Time
Clock
#
Daily On
Occurrence
'
Timer Start
Value Access
#
Timer Input
State at
Power-up
'
!#
Print
Options
Setpoint
Annunciator
Time-out
Value
'
'
Security
Code
Abbreviated
Printing
Flash Timer
Annunciator
#
Time Display
Format
Meter
Address
'
Output Reset
w/Display
Reset
'
Timer/Counter
Auto Reset
Data Bit
'
Setpoint Off
Timer Stop
Setpoint
On
'
Output
Logic
'
'
Cycle Counter
Reset at Power-up
Setpoint 1
Time-out Value
Cycle Counter
Stop Value
RTC Time
Set Access
Daily Off
Occurrence
Setpoint
Action
#'
Setpoint 1
Off Value
Cycle Counter
Start Value
'
Setpoint Off
Value Access
#
Cycle Counter
Stop Value
Access
#
#
'
Setpoint On
Value Access
FUNCTION KEYS
Timer Start
Value
Timer Stop
Value
'
Setpoint
Assignment
Baud Rate
$
Setpoint
Select
Setpoint 1
On Value
Cycle Counter
Count DIrection
Cycle Counter
Count Source
#
Cycle Counter
Start Value
Access
Timer Stop
Value Access
+# Predefined Timer
Operating Mode
#
Real-Time Clock
Time Display
Lock-out
#
#*
Timing
Direction
#
Real-Time Clock
Date Display
Lock-out
#
Cycle Counter
Display
Lock-out
Timer Input
Filtering
Timer Display
Lock-out
USER INPUTS
Timer Input
Operation
Timer Range
Real-Time Clock parameters apply to the PAXCK only.
PAXTM/PAXCK PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
Bulletin No. APLCK-B
Drawing No. LP0435
Released 1/04
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODELS APLCK - APOLLO REAL TIME CLOCK/ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR AND
PBLCK - 4/6 DIGIT MODULE FOR USE WITH THE LARGE DIGIT DISPLAY (LDD)
!
12-HOUR AND 24-HOUR FORMAT
!
MONTH/DAY/YEAR CALENDAR
!
4-HOUR BATTERY BACK-UP
!
3 TIMING MODES (Including Elapsed Time)
!
0.006% ACCURACY
!
NEMA 4/IP65 SEALED FRONT METAL BEZEL
!
0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAY (APLCK)
DESCRIPTION
SAFETY SUMMARY
The Apollo Clock is a real time clock capable of displaying time in 24 and
12-hour formats. The 24-hour format can be displayed in hours and minutes or
in hours, minutes, and seconds. The 12-hour format is displayed in hours,
minutes with a P to indicate the PM hours. The Apollo Clock is also capable of
calendar display in month and day or in month, day and year. These units will
allow for all leap year rollovers (extra day in February), and will account for all
yearly and monthly changeovers.
The Apollo Clock has additional timing modes similar to those of a
stopwatch. Two control lines are associated with these modes. In Mode A, the
APLCK/PBLCK measures the time between a negative going pulse on the first
control line and a negative going pulse on the second control line. In Mode B,
the unit times between negative edges of two pulses appearing on a control line.
In Mode C, the unit times as long as the second control line is low (time interval
measurement or elapsed time). All of these modes have four selectable ranges.
These are: minutes and seconds, with hundredths of seconds resolution; hours,
minutes, and seconds; hours; and hours with tenths of hour resolution.
The Apollo Clock has the capability to maintain real time for a minimum of
4 hours after an AC power loss occurs. (Under this condition, the display is
blanked out.)
This unit also has a self-test feature which checks the display driver and the
microprocessor circuitry after power up (if self-test is enabled and battery
turned off). This is a destructive self-test in that all parameters will be reset to
zero after its completion. During self-test, the mode select DIP switches can be
tested to be certain they are set correctly and are functioning properly.
Power and input connections are made via a removable terminal strip located
at the rear of the unit. This strip can accept one #14 AWG wire. DIP switches
at the side of the unit are used to select function, timing modes, and also battery
back-up or self-test enable.
The APLCK has a sealed metal die-cast bezel which meets NEMA 4/IP65
specifications for wash-down and/or dust, when properly installed. Two
mounting clips are provided for easy installation. The clock uses a 6-digit, 0.56"
high LED display, which is readable to 23 feet.
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
CAUTION: Read complete instructions prior
to installation and operation of the unit.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high LED display. (APLCK)
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
APLCK
AC Operation: Available in two voltage ranges. 115 VAC (±10%), or 230
VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz, 12 VA.
DC Operation: 11 to 14 VDC @ 0.5 A max.
PBLCK
AC Operation: Switch selected via the LDD power supply board, 115/230
(±10%), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA for 4-digit, 15 VA for 6-digit (including LDD).
3. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC (±25%) @ 100 mA max.
4. TIME ACCURACY: 0.006%
5. TIMING MODE ACCURACY: ±(0.006% +10 msec)
6. BATTERY BACK-UP: 4 hours min. Unit will maintain time and all other
settings (display is blanked out during battery back-up).
7. CONTROL INPUTS: Response Time = 10 msec max. VIL = 1.2 VDC and
VIH = 3.5 VDC. All will work with VCM [E-H].
8. INPUT & POWER CONNECTIONS: There is a plug-in compression
type, barrier strip located at the rear of the unit. This strip can be removed
from the rear of the unit for ease of wiring.
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 45°C
Storage Temperature: -20 to 50°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 45°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only)., IEC 529
Type 4 Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
EMC EMISSIONS:
Meets EN 50081-1: Residential, Commercial, and Light Industrial
Environment.
CISPR 22 Radiated and conducted emissions
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.1" (53.3)H x 5.5" (140)W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
1
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
EMC IMMUNITY:
Meets EN 50082-2: Industrial Environment.
ENV 50140 - Radio-frequency radiated electromagnetic field
ENV 50141 - Radio-frequency conducted electromagnetic field
EN 61000-4-2 - Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-4 - Electrical fast transient/burst (EFT)
EN 61000-4-8 - Power frequency magnetic field
Note: Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
11. CONSTRUCTION: Die-cast metal front bezel with black, high impact
plastic insert. Front panel meets NEMA 4/IP65 requirements for indoor use
when properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. (Panel
gasket and mounting clip included with unit.)
12. WEIGHT:
APLCK: 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg)
PBLCK: 0.4 lbs (0.18 Kg)
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The unit should be mounted in a metal enclosure, that is properly connected
to protective earth.
a. If the bezel is exposed to high Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) levels, above
4 Kv, it should be connected to protective earth. This can be done by making
sure the metal bezel makes proper contact to the panel cut-out or connecting
the bezel screw with a spade terminal and wire to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VB3
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
INPUT & POWER CONNECTIONS
Primary AC power is connected to terminals 1 and 2 (marked AC power,
located on the left-hand side of the rear terminal block). Enclosed with the
PBLPT module is an adhesive backed label(s) showing the terminal block
pin-out. This label is for wiring reference only, do not use for specifications.
This label should be applied to the appropriate location by the user.
CAUTION: The terminal block should NOT be removed with power
applied to unit. The module should not be removed from the LDD with
power applied to the LDD or the module.
All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation,
local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied to the unit
be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. For best results, the AC power
should be relatively “clean” and within the specified ±10% variation limits.
Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits, or from circuits that also power
loads that cycle on and off, should be avoided.
Terminal 3 is the +12 VDC terminal. +12 VDC power can be applied to this
terminal, or 100 mA @ +12 V can be drawn from this terminal. Terminal 4 is
the “COMM.” terminal to which the time and calendar inputs can be connected.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
2
CLOCK TIME/CALENDAR DATE DISPLAY
MODES
Install five panel-mounted 250 VAC rated remote switches,
wired individually, from Terminals 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 to Comm.
to allow for changing of the display, date, time, timer modes,
and timer ranges. These circuits are ELV rated.
CALENDAR
The APLCK/PBLCK has the DIP SWITCH CLOCK
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1
2
capability of displaying time and date
↓
↓
23.59.59 MO.DAY.YR
in three different modes. They are: 24hour clock in hours, minutes, seconds
↓
↑
23-59
MONTH-DAY
with month/ day/year; 24-hour clock in
↑
↓
12-59 P MO.DAY.YR
hours and minutes with month and
↑
↑
12-59 P MONTH-DAY
day; or 12-hour clock in hours and
minutes (P indicates PM hours, blank indicates AM hours) with month and day.
The table shows the position DIP switches 1 and 2 (located along the side of the
unit) must be set at to obtain the desired display mode.
Note: DIP switches 1 and 2 also sets the Timer ranges in the Timer mode.
To activate the clock time display (real time clock function) Terminal 5
(Time/Date) and Terminal 6 (CLK/(Timer)) should NOT have a closed circuit
to Terminal 4 (Comm.). To activate the calendar date display, close the circuit
between Terminal 5 and “COMM.” Leave Terminal 6 open.
TIMER MODE RANGES
The APLCK/PBLCK has four DIP SWITCH
TIMER MODE RANGES
range settings when used in the
(Max. Values)
1
2
Timer mode. They are: hours;
↓
↓
999999
HOURS
tenths of hours; hours, minutes,
↓
↑ 99999.9 HOURS.TENTH
and seconds; or minutes, seconds,
and hundredths of seconds. The
↑
↓ 99.59.59
HR.MIN.SEC
table shows what positions DIP
↑
↑ 59.59.99 MIN.SEC.HUN
switches 1 and 2 (located along
the side of the unit) must be set at to obtain the desired range.
Note: DIP switches 1 and 2 also sets the clock/calendar display in the real
time clock function.
To activate the Timer mode ranges, close the circuit from Terminal 6
(CLK/(Timer)) to Terminal 4 (Comm.). Terminal 5 has no effect on the
operation of the Timer.
Install five panel-mounted 250 VAC rated remote switches,
wired individually, from Terminals 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 to Comm.
to allow for changing of the display, date, time, timer modes,
and timer ranges. These circuits are ELV rated.
HOW TO USE THE TIMER MODES
Terminals 7 and 8 are at a +5 VDC (high) level when not connected to
Terminal 4 “COMM.”. Timer modes are implemented by closing the circuit
from one or both of these terminals to “COMM.” as described below.
Note: While the unit is used as a timer, the real time clock (time and date)
continues to update. However, none of the Timer modes will continue to
update while the unit is in the real time clock mode. Therefore, once in
the Timer mode, it must remain there until all timing requirements
are completed.
HOW TO DISPLAY & CHANGE DATE & CLOCK
TIME
Whenever the date is changed, the time must be reset. Therefore, the date
should always be changed before the time is changed. Setting of date and time
on the Apollo Clock is very similar to that of most digital wristwatches.
Procedures below describe how to do this.
TO DISPLAY CALENDAR DATE
Close the circuit from Terminal 5 to “COMM.” in order to place the unit into
the date display mode.
TIMER MODE A
Closing the circuit from Terminal 7
(START) to “COMM.” will cause the unit to
increment time. Closing the circuit from
Terminal 8 (STOP) to “COMM.” will cause
the unit to stop incrementing time. This
cycle can be repeated without resetting to
“0” in order to accumulate a total of several
timings.
TO CHANGE CALENDAR DATE
1. Close the circuit from Terminal 5 (DATE) to “COMM.” The date display
mode must be selected before it can be changed.
2. Close the circuit from Terminal 9 (SET) to “COMM.” (This places the unit into
the “SET” mode). At this point, the right-most digit of the display will flash.
3. Close the circuit from Terminal 7 (SCROLL) to “COMM.” Now the rightmost digit will scroll (increment from 0 through 9). When the desired digit
value appears, open the circuit between Terminal 7 and “COMM.”
4. Close the circuit from Terminal 8 (SELECT) to “COMM.” until the next digit
to the left flashes, then open the circuit between Terminal 8 and “COMM.”
5. Close the circuit from Terminal 7 to “COMM.” until the desired value
appears in this position.
6. Continue this process of scrolling and selecting until all 6 digits have been
set to the desired date. Open the circuits on Terminals 5 & 9.
TIMER MODE B
Closing the circuit from Terminal 7
(START) to “COMM.” will cause the unit to
increment time. A second closed
connection to “COMM.” (input must go
high first) on Terminal 7 will cause the unit
to stop incrementing time. [Terminal 8 must
remain at a high level during this mode.]
This cycle can be repeated without resetting
to “0” in order to accumulate a total of
several timings.
TO DISPLAY CLOCK TIME
Terminal 5 must be at a high level (no connections).
TO CHANGE CLOCK TIME
When setting time, the unit must be set as if it were a 24-hour clock
(23.59.59).
1. Close the circuit from Terminal 9 (SET) to “COMM.” (This places the unit into
the “SET” mode). At this point, the right-most digit of the display will flash.
2. Close the circuit from Terminal 7 (SCROLL) to “COMM.” Now, the rightmost digit will scroll (increment from zero through 9). When the desired digit
value appears, open the circuit between Terminal 7 and “COMM.”
3. Close the circuit from Terminal 8 (SELECT) to “COMM.” until the next digit
to the left flashes, then open the circuit between Terminal 8 and “COMM.”
4. Close the circuit from Terminal 7 to “COMM.” until the desired value
appears in this position.
5. Continue this process of scrolling and selecting until all 6 digits have been
set to the desired time. Remember, the time must always be set as a 24-hour
unit. Open the circuit between Terminal 9 and “COMM.” Approximately
one second after opening the circuit between Terminal 9 and “COMM.”, the
unit will start timing from the new value.
TIMER MODE C
When Terminal 8 (STOP) is low (closed
circuit to “COMM.”), the unit will
increment time. (In this mode, the unit acts
as an elapsed time indicator.) When
Terminal 8 goes high, the unit will stop
incrementing time. [Terminal 7 must
remain at a high level during this mode.]
This cycle can be repeated without resetting
to “0” in order to accumulate a total of
several timings.
TIMER RESET
Closing the circuit from Terminal 9 (RESET) to “COMM.” resets the timer
back to zero. (This will not affect the real time clock function.)
3
SELF-TEST
The unit has a built-in Self-Test feature which will only be entered
immediately after AC power-up with the following conditions:
1. DIP switch 3, the self-test enable/disable switch (located along the side of the
unit) is in the Enable (down) position.
2. DIP switch 4, the BATT. ON/OFF switch is in the OFF (down) position.
When self-test is activated, all digits are cycled through starting with a string
of six zeros. This will be shown for about half a second, then a string of ones
will appear for about the same time duration. Following these, a string of twos
and so on, up to nines will be displayed. (During this time, all the decimal points
will be displayed.) After the nines are shown, the whole display will blank out.
Next, an interlace pattern of 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, then 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, and so on until
all digits from zero to nine have been displayed.
The next portion of self-test will display a group of zeros and/or ones. The
first two digits from the left will always show a zero. The third digit from the
left indicates the status of DIP switch one. Zero indicates the switch is down
(OFF). One indicates the switch is up (ON). The fourth digit from the left
indicates the status of DIP switch two. The remaining two digits are always
shown as zero.
Self-test is automatically exited eight seconds after the DIP switch test.
Note: Clock time, date, and timer will be reset to zero after exiting self-test.
BATTERY BACKUP
This unit has internal, rechargeable batteries that can operate the unit for a
minimum of 4 hours without AC power (provided the unit has been previously
powered up for at least 48 continuous hours. This is necessary to charge the
batteries). To enable battery backup, DIP switch 4 (BATT.) must be in the up
(ON) postion. When the unit is not going to be used for long periods of time
(days), DIP switch 4 should be in the down (OFF) position.
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
INSTALLATION
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the keypad of the unit.
PBLCK installation information is contained in the LDD bulletin. Refer to
that bulletin for instructions on installing the module.
The APLCK unit meets NEMA 4/IP65 requirements for indoor use, when
properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed
panel with a gasket to provide a water-tight seal. Two mounting clips and
screws are provided for easy installation. Consideration should be given to the
thickness of the panel. A panel which is too thin may distort and not provide
a water-tight seal. (Recommended minimum panel thickness is 1/8".)
After the panel cut-out has been completed and deburred, carefully slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. Insert the unit
into the panel. As depicted in the drawing, install the screws into the narrow
end of the mounting clips. Thread the screws into the clips until the pointed
end just protrudes through the other side.
Install each of the mounting clips by
inserting the wide lip of the clips into
the wide end of the hole, located on
either side of the case. Then snap the
clip onto the case. Tighten the screws
evenly to apply uniform compression,
thus providing a water-tight seal.
CAUTION: Only minimum pressure is
required to seal panel. Do NOT
overtighten screws.
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
APLCK
PART NUMBERS
DESCRIPTION
Apollo Real Time Clock
230 VAC
115 VAC
APLCK010
APLCK000
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the RLC Catalog or
contact your local RLC distributor.
PERSONALITY MODULE
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION
PBLCK
PART NUMBERS
Apollo Real Time Clock Module for use with the 6digit Large Digit Display
PBLCK000
Red Lion Controls Asia
Red Lion Controls
20 Willow Springs Circle
Red Lion Controls BV
Basicweg 11b
31, Kaki Bukit Road 3,
#06-04/05 TechLink
York PA 17402
NL - 3821 BR Amersfoort
Singapore 417818
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Tel +31 (0) 334 723 225
Tel +65 6744-6613
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
Fax +31 (0) 334 893 793
Fax +65 6743-3360
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement